convert baskin-robbins to freshens at the davis – monthan ... monthan convert... · convert...

305
PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE Army & Air Force Exchange Service Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens at the Davis – Monthan Exchange PN: 4085-15-000003 Bldg #2527 Facility #4085280100 100% Construction Documents 12/1/2015 Architects West PN: 1574

Upload: lenguyet

Post on 18-Nov-2018

235 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

PROJECT MANUAL

FOR THE

Army & Air Force Exchange Service

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens at the Davis – Monthan Exchange

PN: 4085-15-000003 Bldg #2527

Facility #4085280100

100% Construction Documents 12/1/2015

Architects West PN: 1574

Project Manual for

ARMY & AIR FORCE EXCHANGE SERVICE

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens at the Davis-Monthan Exchange

PN: 4085-10-000003 Bldg #2527, Facility #4085280100

EXCHANGE PROJECT MANAGER:

Mike Fitzpatrick 3911 S. Walton Walker Blvd.

Dallas, TX 75236 (214) 312-4535

DAVIS-MONTHAN GENERAL MANAGER:

Robin Chetri 5405 E. Granite Street, Bldg. 2527

Davis-Monthan AFB, AZ 85707 (520) 748-7887

ARCHITECT: ARCHITECTS WEST, INC.

210 E. Lakeside Avenue Coeur d'Alene, ID 83814

Ph (208) 667-9402; Fx (208) 667-6103

MECHANICAL ENGINEER:

COFFMAN ENGINEERS 10 N. Post Street, Ste. 500

Spokane, WA 99201 Ph (509) 328-2994; Fx (509) 328-2999

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:

TRINDERA ENGINEERING 1875 N. Lakewood Drive, Ste. 201

Coeur d'Alene, ID 83814 Ph (208) 676-8001; Fx (208) 676-0100

AW #1455 12/1/15

12/01/15

TABLE OF CONTENTS Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 00 01 10 - 1

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF PROJECT

01 10 17 – EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/EI)

01 10 18 – EXCHANGE FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI)

01 10 60 – SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

01 14 50 – CUTTING AND PATCHING

01 23 00 – OPTIONS

01 25 00 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

01 31 00 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 33 10 – WEATHER TABLE

01 35 43 – ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

01 65 00.1 – DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354

01 65 00.4 – DD FORM 1354 EXAMPLE

01 71 00 – CLEANING

01 77 00 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

01 78 39 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 16 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 40 23 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 – STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

12/01/15

TABLE OF CONTENTS Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 00 01 10 - 2

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09 22 16 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD

09 30 00 – TILING

09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 90 00 – PAINTING DIVISION 22 – SPECIFICATIONS

22 00 00 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

22 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 05 23 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT

22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION

22 11 16 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 11 19 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 13 16 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 13 19 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 0010 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

26 0501 – MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

26 0519 – BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0534 – CONDUIT

26 0535 – SURFACE RACEWAYS

26 0537 – BOXES

26 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 2717 – WIRING DEVICES

26 3353 – STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 0010 – GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

27 0500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

27 100 – STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY OF PROJECT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment, materials and incidentals necessary to perform all operations required to complete the work, all in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

B. The work to be performed is located at Davis – Monthan AFB, Tucson AZ.

C. Principal Features:

1. The work to be performed in connection with this project includes, but is not limited to: Replace existing Baskin-Robbins with Freshens in the food court of the existing shopping center.

2. Improvements will include the following:

a. (Provide detailed scope description.)

D. The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the Contract:

Cleaning up; Material and Workmanship; Accident Prevention; Protection of Existing Structures, Utilities and Improvements; Operation and Storage Areas; Site Investigation; Permits and Responsibilities. Copies of the General Provisions may be obtained from the Contracting Officer.

1.2 SPECIAL BASE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regular business hours during the week for the Base Civil Engineer are 7:00AM to 4:00PM, Monday through Friday, excluding Federal Holidays. The Exchange normal business hours of operation are from 9:00AM to 7:00PM, Monday through Saturday and 10:00AM to 8:00PM on Sundays. On Holidays the Exchange is open from 10:00AM to 6:00PM. Many items of work can only be performed at night after hours once the Exchange is closed to customers. The Exchange will be available to the Contractor on a 24/7 basis. A 24 hour advance notice to the Exchange General Manager is required to confirm on site security is available during non-operation hours. Failure on the part of the Contractor to give this advance notice may result in the facility not being accessible for work. The Contractor shall coordinate this work schedule closely with the EXCHANGE store manager and notify the Installation Military Police prior to performing work after normal business hours.

B. The Contractor is to familiarize themselves with the requirements for gaining daily access

to the base. All workers, subcontractors and material deliveries will require permits to gain site entry.

C. Davis-Monthan AFB may require special access requirements during times of heightened

security measures and/or force protection events requiring the Contractor to adjust schedules and access accordingly. Advance notice will be given to the Contractor as soon as possible in the event of such an occurrence.

1.3 UTILITIES (WATER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 2

A. Existing hose bibbs will be used to obtain water for this project. The Contractor will not be

charged for consumption of utilities (water, gas and electricity) refer to Section 01 50 00, “Temporary Utilities”.

1.4 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by the Contractor.

Discrepancies between drawings, specifications, and conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon the Contractor to carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the

construction contemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any discrepancy be found, he shall immediately report the same to the Contracting Officer for verifications and adjustment. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on the Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his sole expense.

D. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate generally the design and

arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the work required. The exact location or arrangement of equipment is subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to EXCHANGE. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and the Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.5 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where this project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires and equipment. Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground improvements which

are shown on the drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such improvements shown on the drawings.

C. Locations of underground lines, shown on the drawings, are based on the best available

sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavating in adjacent areas.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 3

1.6 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved section of the utility. In some cases, the Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utility services may be interrupted only when approved by the Contracting Officer. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and facilities engineer in writing at least seven days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. Depending upon the activities at the facility which require continuous service from the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.7 EXCAVATION

A. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit, from the Facilities Engineers Office. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the necessary signatures and coordination for the permit.

1.8 WELDING PERMIT

A. Prior to commencing any welding, the Contractor shall obtain a welding permit from the Facilities Engineer's or Fire Department.

1.9 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices by the State Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

1.10 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES

A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:

1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances

are not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,

wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Installation Fire Department 24 hours ahead of usage.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 4

1.11 FIRE PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

B. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for

storing flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.

C. A contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is

being performed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the premises.

D. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations

of NFPA No. 10 and 241. However, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building.

E. Fire Codes: The Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, and

Base/Post Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on base/post. 1.12 WORK BY OTHERS (IF APPLICABLE)

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:

1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Exchange. 3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or

Concessionaires. 1.13 EXCHANGE-FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (IF APPLICABLE)

A. See Specification Section 01 10 17: EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment.

1.14 EXCHANGE FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (IF APPLICABLE)

A. See Specification Section 01 10 18: EXCHANGE Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment.

1.15 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling and pavement materials that:

1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically

placed wherever possible. This includes heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 5

3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shall establish center lines for all trades.

1.16 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.

B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to

disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Exchange Service.

1.17 HEADROOM UNDER PIPES

A. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearance be less than 7'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.18 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction thereof.

1.19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions shall not always permit their installation in the location shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. The Contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer.

1.20 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for overloading any part or parts of structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 6

1.21 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force

and effect as though printed in these specifications. These standards are not furnished to bidders for the reason that the manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements.

1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and

standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition including amendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

4. Where ASTM Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.22 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer for all items so specified.

1.23 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE

A. EXCHANGE shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during and prior to the absolute completion of the total work. Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.24 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. See Specification Section 01 40 00: Testing Services. 1.25 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" or “Exchange” in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES).

B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be

interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Summary 01 10 00 - 7

C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Base, Post, Installation or Facility: Location on which Exchange is being

remodeled. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation

of the concessions such as Beauty Shop, Barber Shop, and Laundry/Dry Cleaners.

4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working drawings and specifications.

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by EXCHANGE.

1.26 TOXIC MATERIALS

A. Removal or disposal of toxic materials or asbestos is not included in this contract. If the Contractor encounters such materials, he shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment 01 10 17 - 1

SECTION 01 10 17

EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXCHANGE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (EF/EI)

A. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.

B. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficial occupancy by EXCHANGE usage prior to completion of entire project.

C. EXCHANGE will furnish and install equipment as indicated on the Fixture Plan in the

drawings.

D. Contractor's Duties:

1. Provide access for EXCHANGE personnel. 2. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that

installation can be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule. 3. Provide mechanical and electrical connections to equipment and building systems

where indicated on the drawings and in the specification. 4. Provide security of designated areas. 5. Schedule equipment delivery dates and installation times to coordinate with the

overall schedule. Provide EXCHANGE advance notice so equipment can be ordered on time.

E. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area

for installation of property. 2. Make final mechanical and electrical connections between property and building

systems where indicated on the drawings and/or in the specifications. 3. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial

occupancy. 1.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of EXCHANGE furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and redelivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

1.3 EXCHANGE ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Retail Sales Areas: Schedule date of installation of fixtures and possession of these areas 30 days prior to completion of project.

B. MPA: Schedule date of installation of storage shelving and equipment 30 days prior to

completion of project.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment 01 10 17 - 2

C. Serving Areas & Food Preparation Areas: Schedule date of use and possession of food

preparation serving areas 30 days prior to completion of project.

D. Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by EXCHANGE shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so EXCHANGE may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended. Comply with Contract Clauses titled inspection of Construction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (EF/EI):

A. Equipment or material to be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE is as follows and as indicated on the Drawings: 1. All store shelving and fixtures. 2. Check-out Fixtures and POS. 3. Interior graphic signage. 4. Microwaves and refrigerator. 5. Office furniture. 6. Storage shelving. 7. Satellite Dish. 8. Telephone system equipment. 9. Security equipment. 10. Walk-in coolers and freezers (electrical and mechanical service, connections, lighting and

fire protection by Contractor). 11. Food Concept equipment. 12. Mall services fixtures and equipment. 13. MPA fixtures and equipment. 14. Cash/gun vault. 15. MPA garment conveyor.

1.5 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by EXCHANGE of an area for beneficial occupancy, the Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.

B. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently

complete for beneficial occupancy by EXCHANGE, the area will be accepted in writing with the exception of the deficiencies listed. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at the completion of the project.

C. Damage: Damage resulting from EXCHANGE's use will not be considered the

Contractor's responsibility.

D. Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the EXCHANGE "General Provisions".

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange EXCHANGE Furnished and Installed Equipment 01 10 17 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CONNECTIONS:

A. All final electrical connections to EXCHANGE furnished and installed equipment shall be made by the Contractor as part of the construction contract. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place.

B. The Contractor shall provide for and cooperate with personnel installing EXCHANGE furnished materials and equipment, should overlap of work occur.

END OF SECTION 01 10 17

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange EXCHANGE Furnished and Contractor Installed Equipment 01 10 18 - 1

SECTION 01 10 18

EXCHANGE FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXCHANGE FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (EF/CI):

A. EXCHANGE furnished/Contractor installed equipment shall be handled in accordance with the "Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "EXCHANGE Furnished Property".

B. EXCHANGE Furnished Equipment: EXCHANGE will furnish the equipment indicated for

installation by the Contractor, as follows:

1. EXCHANGE Furnished/Contractor Installed Items:

a. Concept signage. b. Food Concept specialty menu boards, lighting and water filter system.

C. Contractor's Duties:

1. Designate required delivery date for each product. Notify the Contracting Officer

in writing at least 60 days in advance of the date that EXCHANGE furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed.

2. The equipment will be received at the job site by a representative of the EXCHANGE who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities. The representative will then effect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment to the Contractor.

3. Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install set in final position, align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of equipment. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment plans, and schedules shown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by EXCHANGE.

4. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE furnished equipment in place.

5. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. 6. Apply finish indicated, if any. 7. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and

electrical hook ups, and put into good operating condition. 8. Provide and install furring strips as required for installation of clipless wall system.

D. EXCHANGE Duties:

1. Deliver all EXCHANGE furnished items to the job site. Schedule delivery date

with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart. 2. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange EXCHANGE Furnished and Contractor Installed Equipment 01 10 18 - 2

1.2 DELIVERY:

A. Contractor shall unload, handle, store, protect, uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join, and level all Exchange-Furnished material, and shall make all utility connections thereto. EXCHANGE will provide supervision for installation of the material.

B. The material will be received at the job site by a representative of the local EXCHANGE who, together with the Contractor, will jointly verify conditions and quantities. The representative of the local EXCHANGE will then affect receipted transfer of custody of the material to the Contractor. Material damaged by or during construction operations shall be replaced at no additional cost to EXCHANGE.

1.3 FAILURE TO VERIFY:

A. Failure to execute above required verification shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper installation of the material, which shall be installed without additional cost to EXCHANGE.

1.4 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60 days in advance of the designated delivery date. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of EXCHANGE furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost. Should EXCHANGE be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The GC shall construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and conduit, and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure EXCHANGE-furnished equipment in place. All final electrical connections to EXCHANGE furnished equipment shall be made by the Contractor as part of the Construction Contract.

END OF SECTION 01 10 18

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Safety Policies and Procedures 01 10 60 - 1

SECTION 01 10 60

SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for reading the Risk Assessment Plan and following the directions therein.

2. Contractor must maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk assessment: That is, 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week

B. Sample Construction Hazard Plan. C. Sample Safety Plan.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Submittals - Section 01 33 00 (Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan, Emergency Response Plan).

B. Record Documents - Section 01 78 39. C. Environmental Protection – Section 01 35 43

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120 2. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication. – EM 385-1-1: Safety and Health Requirements

Manual (Most current version). 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for EXCHANGE approval - The following items shall be submitted for EXCHANGE approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified

employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied. This person shall be on site at all times that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training requirements for their job capacity.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Safety Policies and Procedures 01 10 60 - 2

B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan.

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

b. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to perchloroethylene (tetrachloroethylene) (PCE), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

c. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1. The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2. Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires. Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3. Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation and/or EXCHANGE as areas of known hazards only. These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4. Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

(a) Must be kept on site, and must be written. (b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for each

site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation). (c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120). (d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by

employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

(e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).

(f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).

(g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

(h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

(i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

(j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).

(k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Safety Policies and Procedures 01 10 60 - 3

(l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

(m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

(n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer and Installation Safety Office.

d. Hazard Response Plan: The unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards

as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by all contractors. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the contractor (sample provided).

e. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all hazardous materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. The Installation will schedule subsequent safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis. The Owner's representative and installation will attend periodically. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Base requirements. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of an Accident Report.

1.7 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of this section during the life of the contract. 1.8 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas. The Contractor shall post the area and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 10 60

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cutting and Patching 01 14 50 - 1

SECTION 01 14 50

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. C. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section. 2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of EXCHANGE or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cutting and Patching 01 14 50 - 2

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work. B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work. C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture

resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior

approval. 3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work. B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work. C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate

surfaces to receive patching and finishing. D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements,

and sight-exposed surfaces. E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with

fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cutting and Patching 01 14 50 - 3

H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection

or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION 01 14 50

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation:

1. Justification. 2. Coordination information. 3. Detailed comparison. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. 6. Certificates and qualification data. 7. List of similar installations. 8. Material test reports. 9. Research reports. 10. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule. 11. Cost information. 12. Contractor's certification. 13. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time.

B. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through EXCHANGE Project Manager of acceptance or rejection within 15 Insert number days of receipt, or ten days of receipt of additional information.

1.2 CONTRACTING OFFICERS APPROVAL

A. The contract is based on materials and methods described in the contract document. B. The Contracting Officer will consider proposals for substitution of materials, equipment and

methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required by the Contracting Officer to evaluate the proposed substitution.

C. Do not substitute materials or equipment, unless such substitution has been specifically ap-

proved for this Work by the Contracting Officer. D. Requests for substitution must be made no less than 10 days prior to proposal closing date, in

which case the bidder shall not be liable for costs of the Contracting Officers review, or at any time following award of Contract, in which case, however, the contractor shall be liable for costs of the Contracting Officer’s review. No further substitutions will be permitted after contract award.

E. Where the phrase “or equal” or “or equal as approved in advance by the Contracting Officer”

occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material and equipment will be approved as equal by the Contracting Officer unless the item has been specifically approved for this work by the Contracting Officer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 2

F. The decision of the Contracting Officer shall be final.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS FOLLOWING AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Substitutions for Cause: Not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of submittals. The submittal must include a justification explaining the rational for the requested substitution.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed after contract award.

1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEMS

A. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during or-derly and timely progress of the Work.

B. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, notify the Contracting Officer 10-

days prior to receipt of proposals. C. Costs of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have

been avoided by the Contractor, will be back-charged as necessary and shall not be borne by EXCHANGE,

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM To: Architects West, Inc. Project: Davis-Monthan Express/Class 6 Renovation 210 E. Lakeside Ave. Coeur d’Alene, ID 83814 Bid Date: _______________________ Attn: Steve Roth, Project Architect Phone: (208) 667-9402; Fax: (208) 667-6103 E-mail: [email protected] We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: Specified: SECTION ITEM MANUFACTURER ___________ ______________ _________________________________ Proposed Substitution: Product (Include complete catalog info., model, size, type, etc.) Manufacturer:___________________________________________ Street Address:__________________________________________ City:__________________________________________________ State:__________________________________________________ Phone:________________________ Fax:_____________________ Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which substitution will require for proper installation. Please respond to the following questions: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on the drawings? ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ C. What effect does the substitution have on other trades? ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ D. What are the differences between the proposed substitution and the specified item? ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ E. In what respect are the Manufacturer’s guarantees different for the proposed substitute compared to the guarantees for the specified item? ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. ________________________________________ Signature ________________________________________ Name ________________________________________ Firm ________________________________________ Address ________________________________________ ___________________ ___________________ Phone Fax ________________________________________ Date

For Use by Architect Only: ____ Accepted ____ Accepted as noted ____ Not Accepted ____ Received too late ____ Accepted for bidding: Subject to review and Acceptance of Submittal Reviewed by:__________________________ Date:_________________________________ Notes:

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect and EXCHANGE Project Manager.

B. Architect's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log: Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. Submit log weekly.

1.2 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use EXCHANGE’ Project Web site for project communication and documentation.

B. EXCHANGE to provide up to seven Project Web site user licenses for use of , EXCHANGE's Commissioning Authority, Contractor, Architect, and Architect's consultants. EXCHANGE to provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users.

C. Project Web site software package:

1. Autodesk, Constructware.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer and/or Contracting Officer’s representative will schedule and preside at preconstruction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officers and/or Contracting Officer’s representative and other Headquarters

EXCHANGE representatives. 2. Local and regional EXCHANGE representatives. 3. Installation representative (Engineering, Fire Marshall, Security, etc.) 4. Contractor 5. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of sub-contractors. 4. Review of EXCHANGE checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Schedule. 6. Discussion of critical sequencing. 7. Designation of responsible personnel.

12/01/15

Davis-Monthan Express/Class 6 Renovation Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 2

8. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 9. Submission of applications for payment. 10. Submittal of shop drawings. 11. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 12. Fire and safety procedures. 13. Security procedures. 14. Accident prevention and reports. 15. Housekeeping procedures. 16. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

17. Major equipment deliveries. 18. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to EXCHANGE, Contractor,

and Installation Engineer. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The contractor shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings. B. The contractor shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for partici-

pants. C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice. D. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor's project manager. 2. Contractor's superintendent. 3. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 4. EXCHANGE representative (EXCHANGE' option).

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: A/E shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants (in-

cluding the EXCHANGE Contracting Officer, within three (3) business days of the meeting.

12/01/15

Davis-Monthan Express/Class 6 Renovation Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 3

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect , and EXCHANGE’ Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. LEED requirements/Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes.

12/01/15

Davis-Monthan Express/Class 6 Renovation Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 01 31 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Format

B. Content

C. Revisions to schedules D. Submittals

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Provisions of the EXCHANGE Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and Progress"

B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Project

C. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals

1.4 GENERAL

A. The Contractor-prepared progress chart shall serve as a guide in managing the construc-tion progress.

B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor. C. The schedules shall be prepared using the Critical Path Method (CPM).

1.4 FORMAT

A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.

B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer to evaluate the reasonable-

ness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule. 1.5 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and comple-tion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.

C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work

completed as of the first day of each month. D. Indicate delivery dates for EXCHANGE furnished products.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00 - 2

1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and projected completion date of each activity.

B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other

identifiable changes which could affect the schedule.

C. Provide narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a preliminary schedule through the Contracting Officer defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project. Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary schedule by the Contracting Officer and within thirty

(30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete Progress Schedule.

C. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each monthly Application for Payment.

D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires plus four (4) cop-

ies which will be retained by Contracting Officer. 1.8 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indi-

cated in schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 32 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules. C. Shop Drawings. D. Samples.

E. Product Data.

F. Certificates.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Project.

B. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Schedules

C. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with EXCHANGE Form 4450-48, Shop Drawings and Material Approval Submittal.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a

sequential alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail num-ber, and specification section number, as appropriate.

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification

of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of in-formation is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer.

Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents even though such submittals are approved by the Contracting Officer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 2

G. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted, the contractor shall include with the

submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certif-icate is mandatory before approval will be issued.

H. Provide space for Contractor and Contracting Officer review stamps.

I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly re-

port any inability to comply with requirements. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Progress Schedule within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit complete (final) Progress Schedule within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Pro-ceed.

C. Submit monthly revisions of Progress Schedule.

D. Refer to Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation, for submittal infor-

mation. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 4. After review, and distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures arti-

cle above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

B. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for the EXCHANGE's benefit during and after project completion.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus

three (four on structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

1.6 SAMPLES

A. Samples For Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 3

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Pro-cedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

B. Samples For Information:

1. Submitted for the Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for EXCHANGE.

C. Samples For Selection:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,

or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Contracting Officer selection.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

G. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specifica-

tion sections.

H. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings. 1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.

B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the re-

spective shop drawings or samples. 1.8 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufac-turer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be

acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 4

1.9 LIMITATIONS AND CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Submittals will be reviewed for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the

design concept and the information shown in the drawing and specifications. These re-views shall not include review of the accuracy for completeness of details. A review shall not indicate that the reviewer has checked the entire system of which the reviewed item is a component. The reviewer shall not be required to review partial submissions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 33 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Weather Table 01 33 10-1

SECTION 01 33 10

WEATHER TABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INFORMATION AND DATA A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the Contractor's

information. 1.2 CONTRACT TIME LIMITS B. The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed herein. 1.3 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER A. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract. The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project. B. Weather Table: MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS [Davis-Monthan AFB, Tucson, AZ] JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC 0 0 0 0 1 2 4 2 0 0 0 0 [fill in number of days under each month] This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather time evaluations. Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the contractor's work day and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the above listing, the Contractor may submit in writing to the Contracting Officer a request for a time extension within 30 days of the adverse weather. Based upon the above NOAA data the Contracting Officer will determine if the time extension for the Contractor is warranted. The Contracting Officer will then convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issue a modification in accordance with the contract. Any Time extensions granted under this provision will be at no cost to the EXCHANGE. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 1

SECTION 01 35 43

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (Scope) A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and

performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life; affect other species of importance to humans; or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes. The control of environmental pollution by the contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various

Earthwork and Utilities sections. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility. All environmental rules

applying to contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all Applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement. These include but are not limited to: the Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act, National Historic Preservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, Oil Pollution Act, Archeological Resources Protection Act, and Pollution Prevention Act. Contractor has the duty to determine for itself where such laws and regulations apply. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against

EXCHANGE or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulations resulting from acts or omissions of the contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the contractor for the same conduct. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 2

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify EXCHANGE (which includes the Army, Air

Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the contractor, contractor's employees or agents or subcontractors. "Damages" includes but is not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value), or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney's fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor's failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or EXCHANGE.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental

office of the content of all contacts with federal, state, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.

PART 2 - PERMITS 2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING EXCHANGE

CONTRACTS. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor's

name and at no additional expense to EXCHANGE, all permits, coordinations, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations" includes but is not limited to: the Clean Air Act, Clean Water Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA), Toxic Substances Control Act, Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act, Coastal Zone Management Act, Endangered Species Act, National Historic Preservation Act, Safe Drinking Water Act, Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, Oil Pollution Act, and Pollution Prevention Act and State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION,

DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordinations, certifications

or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (a.) above. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordinations, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the contracting officer for review. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by EXCHANGE will be submitted by EXCHANGE, and any documents that must be submitted by the contractor will be returned after review to the contractor for submission. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 3

PART 3 - MATERIALS 3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with

financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS Asbestos will not be used or included in this project. 3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL'S (PCBs) PCBs will not be used or included in this project. 3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT Lead-based paint will not be used included in this project. 3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES. A. "Class I substance," as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)(40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. "Class II substance," as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by

EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to, hydrochlorofluorocarbons. C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor

shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

"WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*__________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s)public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere." *The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s). D. The contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the

Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling and Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply

pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 4

PART 4 - EXECUTION (WORK PRACTICES) 4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of

fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES A. General: The General Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs

with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable federal, state, regional, municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage: The General Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils,

greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters. In the event of a spill, the contractor must make all required notifications to federal, state or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water: Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation,

and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. General: It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the

limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. The General Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement: Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the

General Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer. The General Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage: Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged

by the General Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the General Contractor's expense. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 31 10 00). All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are subsequently damaged by the General Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 5

4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS. Contractor's actions shall conform to all federal, state, and local requirements for the control of

air emissions during work under this contract. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

PART 5 – POLLUTION PREVENTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL 5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION The contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation

of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular. Recycling should be considered and implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Pollution Prevention: The contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work

practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular. B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal. Work done under this contract is to be

performed on a government facility. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the contracting officer, to installation environmental office. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the contracting officer. Under no circumstances will contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all federal, state, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of

properly, in accordance with all federal, state and local requirements. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. Prior to creation of such wastes, the contractor shall submit to the installation environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and contracting officer. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 6

D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the

installation, as designated by the installation authorities. 2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require

the contractor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.) Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local rules. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the contracting officer. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by a telecopier or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the contracting officer. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative. However, an example is provided at page 7 and this form may be used. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification. The contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans: Contractor may, at contractor’s option, submit for

approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media: 1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is,

consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of EXCHANGE, the installation, and the contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The contractor shall: (1) leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control; or (2) haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been designated either in this contract or in writing by the contracting officer; and (3) if unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated, the contractor shall advise the contracting officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the contracting officer.

DEFINITIONS Media - Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same meanings and usage here

as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively."

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Environmental Protection 01 35 43 - 7

INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED FROM

EXCHANGE PROJECT SITE

As representative of ________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized to certify,

and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the EXCHANGE project site at _______________________ __________________________________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides.

CERTIFICATION: Signed: ____________________________________________________________ Date:

_________________ Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title:

_________________________________________________________ ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER PART 6 - UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS 6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is,

consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions. Should this occur, contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS Should contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract

find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.

END OF SECTION 01 35 43

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).

1

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

2

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY PAGE OF PAGES

1. FROM: (Installation/Activity/Service) 2. OPERATING UNIT

3. DIS TRICT CODE

4. OPER ATING AGENCY

5. DATE 6. JOB NUMBER 7. SERIAL NUMBER

7. CONTRACT NUMBER

15. TYPE OF TRANSACTION 1. FROM: (Installation/Activity/Service) 2. OPERATING UNIT

11. DIS-TRICT CODE

12. OPER ATING AGENCY

13. AC COUNTINGNUMBER

14. AC COUNT-OFFICE NUMBER

NEW CONSTR EXISTING FAC CAPITAL IMP OTHER (SPECIFY)

BENF/O PHYSICAL

COM FIN. COM OTHER

(SPECIFY)

16. PROJECT NUMBER

ITEM NO.

17

CATEGORTY CODE

18

FACILITY (category description)

19

NO. OF UNITS

20

TYPE

21

UNIT OF

MEAS

22

TOTAL QUANTITY

23

COST

24

DRAWING NUMBERS

25

REMARKS

26 4165

27. STATEMENT OF COMPLETION: The facilites listed hereon are in accordance with maps, drawings, and specifications and change orders approved by the authorized representative of the using agency except for the deficiencies listed on the reverse side.

28. ACCEPTED BY (Signature) DATE

TRANSFERRED BY (Signature)

Title (Area Engr./Base Engr/ DPWO)

DATE TITLE (Post Engr./Base Engr./Navy Rep.) 29. PROPERTY

VOUCHER NUMBER

DD FORM 1 N0V 61 1354 SUPERSEDES ENG FORMS 290 AND 290B AND NAVDOCKS FORM 2317

4165.40 (Encl 1) N

ov 14, 61

3

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.

4

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR

5

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.

6

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________

7

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)

8

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

9

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cleaning 01 71 00 - 1

SECTION 01 71 00

CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Progress Cleaning. B. Final Cleaning.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Provisions of the Contract. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary. C. Section 01 14 50 - Cutting and Patching. D. Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls. E. Individual Specification Sections - Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Requirements in 29 CFR 1926 and

29 CFR in 1910. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the Contractor in his performance under the contract. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes, and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or

sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cleaning 01 71 00 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private

dumping areas off of Government property. E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to

eliminate dust. F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw

materials from heights. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning. B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed

interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces. C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from

sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. G. Clean all glass. H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during

construction.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Cleaning 01 71 00 - 3

J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by EXCHANGE.

END OF SECTION 01 71 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Closeout 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion. B. Final Inspections. C. Closeout Submittals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Instruction.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01 71 00 - Cleaning. D. Section 01 65 00 – Starting of Systems. E. Section 01 72 00 - Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection, complete the following.

1. Contractor's list of incomplete items (punch list) prepared.

a. Submit PDF electronic file. b. Submit paper copies.

2. Owner advised of pending insurance changeover. 3. Warranties, maintenance service agreements, and similar documents submitted. 4. Releases, occupancy permits, and operating certificates submitted. 5. Project Record Documents submitted. 6. Tools, spare parts, and extra materials delivered. 7. Final changeover of locks performed. 8. Startup testing completed. 9. Test/adjust/balance records submitted. 10. Temporary facilities removed. 11. Owner advised of heat and utility changeover. 12. Changeover information for use, operation, and maintenance submitted. 13. Owner's personnel instructed in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, including demonstration and training videotapes submitted.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Closeout 01 77 00 - 2

B. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer that project, or designated portion of

Project, is substantially complete. 2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

C. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification. D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be completed

or corrected, as determined by the inspection. 2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion,

containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date EXCHANGE will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof. e. Responsibilities of EXCHANGE and Contractor for:

(1) Utilities. (2) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. (3) Maintenance and cleaning. (4) Security.

f. Signatures of:

(1) Contracting Officer. (2) Contractor.

3. EXCHANGE occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall:

(1) Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 71 00.

b. EXCHANGE will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion.

4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

E. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to contracting officer, certifying

that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete. 3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Closeout 01 77 00 - 3

2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Facility Representatives and are

operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification. C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with

requirements of contract documents, he shall request contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second

written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01 78 39. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and

subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as

described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description

identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:

a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Value chart. f. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. g. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and

materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Closeout 01 77 00 - 4

a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster. f. Warrantees.

E. Submit six (6) copies of the operation and maintenance manuals to the Contracting Officer.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.

1.8 DD FORM 1354:

A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property": At the

conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Contracting Officer certain costs and quantity data of materials and systems furnished and installed. A list of items for which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor. Such information will be returned to the Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list. Form is attached at the end of Division 1.

1.9 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of

Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted to Contracting Officer. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

B. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year. In addition, where separate guarantees, for

certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods.

C. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and

Acceptance by EXCHANGE. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by EXCHANGE, or his successor(s) in interest.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 77 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Submittals: Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1.2 RECORD FIELD DATA

A. General: Maintain at job site, two complete sets of Contract Documents. During construction, both sets shall be marked to show all deviations in actual construction from the Contract Documents.

1. Red Markers: Indicate all additions. 2. Green Markers: Indicate all deletions.

B. Record Documents: The drawings shall show, but no be limited to, the following information:

1. Locations and description of any utility lines and other installations of any kind or description known to exist within the construction area. Include dimensions and/or survey coordinates to permanent features.

2. Locations and dimensions of any changes within the building or structure and the accurate location and dimension of all underground utilities and facilities.

3. Correct grade or alignment of roads, structures and utilities if any changes were made from Contract Drawings.

4. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading. 5. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from shop drawings

prepared or furnished by the Contractor including, but not limited to:

a. Fabrication erection b. Installation and placing details c. Pipe sizes d. Insulation materials e. Equipment pad dimensions

6. Topography and grades of all drainage. 7. All changes or modifications from the original design. 8. Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option actually used in the

construction shall be shown on the Record Drawings. The option not used shall be deleted.

C. Record Field Data: All deviations shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in the Contract Documents. Marking of the documents shall continue throughout construction to keep the documents up to date.

1. Additional Data: The Contractor shall maintain the following:

a. Full size marked-up drawings. b. Survey notes c. Sketches d. Nameplate data

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 2

e. Pricing information f. Description and serial number of all equipment

2. Record field data shall be available for inspection by the Contracting Officer whenever

requested and shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Contracting Officer and Contractor. Failure to keep record field data current shall be sufficient justification to withhold a retained percentage from the monthly Application for Payment.

D. Submittal of Record Field Data:

1. Submit two sets to the Contracting Officer a minimum of 20 calendar days prior to the date of final inspection.

2. The Contractor shall make all corrections identified during Contractor Officer review and resubmit corrected data within ten (10) calendar days of receipt.

3. When data is accepted as complete, one set of documents will be returned to the Contractor for completion of the Record Documents.

1.3 RECORD ELECTRONIC FILE DOCUMENTS

A. Electronic File Format: No earlier than 30 days after award, the Contracting Officer will provide one set of AutoCAD electronic file format contract drawings to be used for preparation of Record Drawings.

1. Media: ISO – 9660 CD 2. The Contractor shall verify usability of AutoCAD files and notify the Contracting Officer of

any discrepancies within 30 calendar days of receipt. Any discrepancies will be corrected and files returned to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall incorporate all deviations from the original Contract Documents as recorded in the approved “Record Field Data” as indicated in Paragraph 1.2.C above.

4. The Contractor shall also incorporate all written modifications to the Contract Documents which were issued by amendment or contract modification.

5. All revisions and changes shall be incorporated:

a. Items marked deleted shall be deleted. b. Clouds around new items shall be removed.

B. Electronic File Submittal: Submit a complete set of Record Drawings in AutoCAD electronic file

format no later than 30 days after final acceptance. The Record Drawings shall be done in equal quality to the originals, including line work, line weights, lettering and symbols. Identify each drawing with the word “RECORD” in block letters at least 3/8” high above the title block. The date of completion and the words “Revised Record” shall be placed in the revision block above the latest revision notation.

1. Format: AutoCAD Release 2005 ‘DWG’ format. All support files required to display or plot

the files in the same manner as they were developed shall be delivered along with the files, including but not limited to:

a. Font files b. Menu files c. Plotter setup d. Referenced files

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 3

2. Layering: Conform to AIA Standard Document, “CAD Layer Guidelines,” latest version. An explanatory list of which layer is used at which drawing and an explanatory list of all layers which do not conform to the standard AIA CAD Layer Guidelines including any user definable fields permitted by the guidelines shall be provided with each submittal.

3. Electronic File Deliverable Media: ISO 9660 Format CD-ROM. Submit three (3) complete

sets of disks and one complete set of full size reproducible prints taken from the disks. Each disk shall have a clearly marked label stating the Contractor’s firm name, project name and location, submittal type (record) and date. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a hard copy transmittal sheet that contains the above information along with tabulated information about each file as shown below:

Electronic File Name Plate Number Drawing Title

a. Include electronic version of the table.

4. Submit one copy of the CD-Rom and one set of full-size Mylar reproducibles of the drawings to (Building Records staff person) at (Post or Base).

1.4 SUBMITTAL OF FINAL RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Complete and return the final record documents and the approved preliminary record documents to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of final acceptance.

1. All drawings from the original contract documents shall be included, including drawings

where no changes were made. 2. The drawings will be returned to the Contractor if corrections are necessary. 3. The Contractor shall make all corrections and shall return the drawings to the Contracting

Officer within seven (7) calendar days of receipt. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT COST

A. All costs incurred by the Contractor in the proportion and furnishing of record documents, including electronic file format, shall be included in the contract price and no separate payment will be made for this work.

1. Approval and acceptance of the final record documents shall be accomplished before final

payment is made to the Contractor. 1.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Provide one set of marked-up record drawings at the time of system acceptance testing. These record drawings shall be in addition to the submittal of marked-up record drawings specified elsewhere in the contract.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 4

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 78 39

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 1

SECTION 02 41 16

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2. Removal of selected interior finishes in areas to be modernized. 3. Patching and repairs. 4. Salvage existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Work by Others: Elements of selective demolition will be accomplished by EXCHANGE or the

Air Force under separate contracts:

1. Graphics Installation by Freshens contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,

salvaged, or to remain EXCHANGE property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain EXCHANGE

property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to EXCHANGE' designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them

for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by the Contracting Officer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain EXCHANGE property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site and legal disposed of off Installation.

1. See Section 01 42 00, Part 5.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. EXCHANGE will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition

area. Conduct selective demolition so that EXCHANGE' operations will not be disrupted.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 2

Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to EXCHANGE of activities that will affect EXCHANGE' operations.

B. EXCHANGE assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively

demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

EXCHANGE as far as practical. C. Hazardous Materials: Asbestos and lead paint are present in areas of demolition. Demolition

(monitoring), removal and disposal must comply with all state and federal codes and requirements of the specifications.

D. Provide secure temporary closure at exterior wall openings where existing infills are removed

or new openings created. E. Where existing opening infills in the retail sales area are scheduled for demolition, maintain

interior wall furring and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.

1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing

materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting Officer.

D. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in

structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition

activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage

during selective demolition operations.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 3

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by EXCHANGE and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to EXCHANGE and to governing authorities. a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to EXCHANGE if shutdown of service is

required during changeover. B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services

serving building to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 Sections for shutting off,

disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,

flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,

streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from EXCHANGE and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings

and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered

passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip

line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal

of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.

5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations.

6. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch

(16-mm) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 4

2. Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 4. Protect air-handling equipment. 5. Weatherstrip openings.

E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve

stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust

and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or

objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and

as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and

materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of

removed items is prohibited. 9. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start

of selective demolition operations.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 5

B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures

with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.

C. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. D. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient

Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the

methods recommended by RFCI. E. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by

selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new

materials. D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining

construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions

extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances. 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken

surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. 4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary,

to achieve uniform color and appearance. 5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where

feasible. F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of

uniform appearance. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to

accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off EXCHANGE' property and legally dispose of

them. Dispose all contaminated materials to an approved disposal site. 3.8 CLEANING

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Selective Demolition 02 41 16 - 6

A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.

END OF SECTION 02 41 16

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

3. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork specially

fabricated for this Project. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally

not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to

weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers

between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including cant strips,

bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes

shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood

preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as

required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 2

A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108.

B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark

evidencing compliance with grade requirements. C. Size and Grade: 4x8x5/8" APA A-C plugged exposure 1.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING

A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-

retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high

relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and

where indicated, flat washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and

that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut

and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 3

F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 1

SECTION 06 40 23

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Plastic-laminate and solid surfacing countertops. 2. Plastic laminate cabinets.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications”.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections.

C. Samples for verification of the following:

1. Laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color,

pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:

1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural

Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,

and deterioration.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 2

B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or

deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions."

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-

work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check

actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support

woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each

type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated:

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.

B. Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: Comply with requirements of

NPA 9. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Laminart. c. Nevamar Corp. d. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. e. Pionite.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 3

E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with

material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish.

1. Products: See Finishes Legend.

2.2 MATERIALS 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with

ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing

manufacturer. B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105

for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure

anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality

standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Custom.

B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment

to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.

2.5 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate-clad cabinets.

1. Grade: Custom.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with

the following requirements:

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 4

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal

thickness. 2. Vertical Surfaces: GP-28, 0.028-inch (0.711-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Edges: GP-28, 0.028-inch (0.711-mm) nominal thickness where noted. 3 mm PVC

matching laminate color unless otherwise noted. D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. (Melamine) 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. (Melamine) 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. (Melamine)

E. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. See Finishes Legend.

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule below for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets.

B. Hardware Standard: documents indicate size, profiles and functional requirements of cabinet

hardware and are based on products of specific manufacturers. Other listed manufacturer's products with equal performance characteristics, as judged by the Contracting Officer, will be acceptable. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hardware by one of the following to match products as scheduled:

1. Accuride. 2. Blum. 3. Bobrick. 4. Corbin. 5. D. Mockett & Co., Inc. 6. Hallmack. 7. Ives. 8. Knape & Vogt. 9. Lawrence. 10. National Lock Co. 11. Stanley.

C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel BHMA 630.

D. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A156.9.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. General: Priming and finishing of interior architectural woodwork required to be performed at

fabrication shop are specified in this section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for material and application requirements for woodwork.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 5

C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling

countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before

installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade

specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with

concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level (including tops).

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged

finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to

grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

E. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space

between backsplash and wall with specified sealant. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,

or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 6

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 06 40 23

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13

STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: 1. Doors: Seamless, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and

exterior locations. 2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, pocket doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions,

interior glazed panels, and other interior and exterior openings of following type:

a. Welded unit type. 3. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.

B. Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and

openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 2

A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors and frames by one of the following: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames:

a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Corp. c. Copco Door Co. d. Curries Company. e. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. f. Fenestra Corp. g. Kewanee Corp. h. Mesker Door Co. i. Pioneer Industries. j. Premier Products, Inc. (Formerly Dittco). k. Republic Builders Products. l. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 3

1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."

2.3 DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.

B. Interior Doors: Provide 1-3/4 inch (44.4 mm) thick doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

2.4 FRAMES

A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, relights and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Frames of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) (16 gauge) thick steel sheet for:

1. Door openings wider than 48 inches (1220 mm). 2. Level 2 steel doors.

C. Frames of 0.075-inch- (14 gauge) thick steel sheet for:

1. Level 3 steel doors.

D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.

F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.

G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene,

unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 4

2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.

B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel.

C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.

E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.

F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for

fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at project site.

H. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.

I. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before

application of paint. 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface

ready to receive finish paint.

J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel. 1. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels

in doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations, place frames

prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 5

construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

2. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.

C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 09 22 16 - 1

SECTION 09 22 16

NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm). 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) for framing supporting ceramic tile substrates.

2. Depth: As indicated or required by conditions of installation.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 09 22 16 - 2

a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

E. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-

steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 09 22 16 - 3

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 09 22 16 - 4

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 09 22 16

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior gypsum board.

1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 2

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. d. PABCO Gypsum. e. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: At Custodial Rooms, Toilet Rooms and Kitchen Prep and Serving Areas.

Install even where gypsum board is covered by ceramic tile, FRP, Stainless Steel or MDF.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 3

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 4

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. High-Impact Type: Where indicated. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: On walls receiving ceramic tile.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 5

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.

D. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 6

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 29 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes porcelain and ceramic tile products on walls and floors in toilet and locker rooms. Substrates include cementitious backer board and concrete masonry at walls and at floors, concrete slabs-on-grade and suspended concrete slabs. Materials include the following:

1. Porcelain tile. 2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant in tile fields. 3. Tile cleaner and sealer. 4. Mortar & Grout.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slab finishes specified for tile over concrete substrates.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Cementitious backer units. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Waterproofing.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 2

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Obtain a written receipt from the Owner’s Representative, to include in Closeout Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Match existing tile products exactly as indicated on the drawings. Refer to drawings for tile product information.

B. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

C. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Porcelain Floor Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:

1. See Finishes Legend and Schedule on individual drawing sheets for description and location.

2. Match existing top products where indicated.

B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the following requirements:

1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.

2. Shapes: As indicated on the Drawings or if not indicated, as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Provide coved base at unglazed floor tile. b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose/metal corner

trim as indicated in Finish Legends and on drawing sheets.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 3

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

e. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.35 mm) across nominal 4-inch (100-mm) dimension.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.1A and as specified below:

1. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed Portland Cement and aggregate mortar bed.

a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard.

2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Floor Grout: Two-component, chemical resistant, non-saging epoxy grout which is water cleanable; grout shall comply with ANSI A118.3. Colors as indicated in Finishes Legend on individual drawing sheets. The following manufacturers and products are approved:

1. Laticrete International “Latapoxy SP-100 Stainless Epoxy Grout (Series 700)”. 2. Mapei, Inc. “Kerapoxy 400 100% Solids Epoxy Grout”. 3. Bostik Construction Products “Hydroment Colo-Poxy”. 4. Custom Building Products “100% Solids Epoxy Grout”.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.

C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

1. Provide at control joints in floors where indicated, or if not indicated, over control joints in substrates and at 30-feet maximum spacing.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 4

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325 ½ inch (12.7 mm) thick.

C. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

E. Tile Sealer: Aqua Mix “Sealer’s Choice 15 Gold.”

1. Description: No-sheen, water-based penetrations sealer. 2. Application: Two coats in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 5

1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants."

G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial Portland Cement, and latex-Portland Cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Tiling 09 30 00 - 6

C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout

manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 30 00

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1

SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.

2. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings."

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 2

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match existing panels exactly.

2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 1. Match existing suspension system exactly.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 3

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

a. Pop rivets acceptable at 9/16” grid only. Painted to match grid.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 4

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION 09 51 13

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 1

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces as defined in the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Man-ual and the following:

1. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.

2. Special Preparation and repainting of existing surfaces.

B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designed in schedules, except where a sur-face or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfac-es. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.

1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, ex-posed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. In general, conduit, ducts, piping and like material exposed in a room or area scheduled to be painted shall be painted, same color as the adjacent surface unless otherwise indi-cated.

3. Painting includes field natural finishing of wood doors.

C. Painting is not required on prefinished items (except as noted), finished metal surfaces, con-cealed surfaces, operating parts and labels.

1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustic materials. b. Plastic laminated architectural casework. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Switchgear. f. Distribution cabinets. g. Prefinished toilet compartments.

2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in inaccessible are-as.

3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:

a. Anodized aluminum b. Stainless steel and Chromium plate. c. Copper, bronze and brass

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 2

4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following:

a. Valve and damper operators b. Linkages c. Sensing devices d. Motor and fan shafts

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or nomenclature plates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and pri-mers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until re-quired sheen, color and texture are achieved.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting sys-tem applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have re-sulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

C. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon re-quest from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

D. Paint Grade: ‘Premium’ as defined by the MPI.

E. Employ only qualified journeymen in this painting and decorating work; apprentices may be em-ployed on the project to work under the direction of qualified journeymen.

F. Conform to the standards contained in the Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual, latest edition (hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Specification Manual) for all painting products including preparation and application of materials. MPI Painting Speci-fication Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality assurance Association having ju-risdiction.

G. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the “Approved Products” section of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 3

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packaged and contain-ers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround-ing air temperature are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during ap-plication and drying periods.

D. Do not proceed with any work under this Section unless a lighting level of a minimum of 15 can-dlepower per square foot is provided on the surfaces to be finished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual “Approved Product” listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.

B. Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 4

C. All materials and paints shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where possible.

D. Manufacturer: Provide products according to the manufacturer and product identification listed in the paint schedules below. Subject to conformance with requirements and properties of the products listed, products of the following manufacturers will be considered.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore) 2. Columbia Paint Co. (Columbia) 3. Fuller (Fuller) 4. Parker Paint Mfg. Company (Parker) 5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) 6. Rodda Paint Co. (Rodda) 7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W)

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's product as specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification shall not be brought to the job site.

C. Paints shall comply with Green Seal Standard GS-11 points.

D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemi-cal restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fab-rication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more ben-zene rings).

7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1, 2-dicholorbenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 5

m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde.

2.3 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Where colors are identified by product names and numbers, provide perfect color match to the listed colors. See "P" numbers in the Finishes Legend and Finish Schedule and the finish chart on the exterior elevation drawing.

2.4 GLOSS

A. MPI Gloss and Sheet Standards are now as follows: Gloss @ 60° Sheen @ 85°

1. Gloss Level 1: A traditional matte finish – flat Max. 5 units Max. 10 units 2. Gloss Level 2: A high side sheen flat – ‘a velvet-like’ finishMax. 10 units 10 – 35 units 3. Gloss Level 3: A traditional ‘eggshell-like’ finish 10 – 25 units 10 – 35 units 4. Gloss Level 4: A ‘satin-like’ finish 20 – 35 units Min. 35 units 5. Gloss Level 5: A traditional semi-gloss 35 – 70 units 6. Gloss Level 6: A traditional gloss 70 – 85 units 7. Gloss Level 7: A high gloss More than 85 units

2.5 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Interior Surfaces: Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual requirements:

1. Metal Fabrications: For steel exposed to view.

a. INT 5.1B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 5) finish.

2. Galvanized Metal: Doors, frames, miscellaneous steel, pipes, ducts, etc.

a. INT 5.3B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 5) finish.

3. Dressed Lumber: Including trim, casings, etc.

a. INT 6.3A: Latex (Gloss Level 3) finish.

4. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material,” etc.

a. INT 9.2B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 3, except in Toilet Rooms, Cus-todial Rooms, IDF Rooms, Tech. Closets and Electrical Room where Level 5 is re-quired. Gloss Level 2 at ceilings except for Gloss Level 5 where Gloss Level 5 is required on walls) finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 6

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and condi-

tions within a particular area.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix-tures and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to com-pletely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatment, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with sub-strates primed by others.

2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shel-lac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood including cabinets, trim, counters, cases and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster or other wet wall

construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of primed or unprimed wood doors with a heavy

coat of varnish, primer or sealer immediately upon delivery.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use sol-vent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 7

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from gal-vanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

5. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, cement plaster and reinforced concrete panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the coating manufactur-er.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coating to blister and burn, correct this condition before coating application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions.

3.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXISTING SURFACES SCHEDULED FOR REPAINT

A. General: Reference is made to the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual for the ter-minology used to describe the existing conditions. This information is not intended to permit or encourage the Bidder/Contractor to forgo site visits and inspections to determine actual condi-tions before the Contract is awarded.

3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. General: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials or residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended lim-its.

B. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multi-ple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

1. Paint surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the ap-

plication method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coats has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is re-quired to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 8

4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles and similar components are in place. Extend coating in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur-faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

9. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. 10. Paint unfinished wood cleats, underside of casework, desk tops and similar items.

C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other-wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur-face deterioration.

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat un-til paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the under-coat to lift or lose adhesion.

D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions and requirements of the surface to be painted.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size and recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 mils for the entire system of prime and finish coats for three coat work, or 2.5 mils where two coat work is specified.

F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other de-fects due to insufficient sealing.

G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evi-dence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections.

H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uni-form finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

12/01/15

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Painting 09 90 00 - 9

I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, or-ange peel, nail holes or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint materials from the site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting as acceptable to the Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 90 00

12/1/2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Page - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 22 – SPECIFICATIONS

22 00 00 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

22 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 05 23 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT

22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION

22 11 16 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 11 19 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 13 16 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 13 19 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 1

SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING – GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 01 of these specifications, which govern work under DIVISION 23. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional related requirements.

1.2 SCOPE OF REQUIREMENTS

A. The work covered by Division 22 of the specifications shall include but not be limited to:

1. Furnishing all materials and supplying all labor, equipment and services to install the complete mechanical system as shown on the accompanied drawings and specified herein.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The contract documents including specifications and construction drawings are intended to provide all material and labor to install complete plumbing systems for the building.

B. Every effort has been made on the design to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Codes; therefore, unless Contractor before signing his Contract, shall have notified the Architect, in writing, of any items in conflict with said Codes, he shall thereafter make any minor adjustments necessary to meet said Codes at no cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior detail, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the equipment and are not to be scaled; all dimensions shall be checked at the building.

D. The Contractor shall comply with the project close-out requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS

A. Specifications:

1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.

2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.

B. Drawings:

1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment and methods of installation.

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 2

2. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are for estimating purposes only.

3. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.

4. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and structure.

5. Make adjustments that may be necessary or requested in order to resolve space problems, preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades.

6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Architect or Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible.

1.5 CODES PERMITS AND FEES

A. Mechanical work shall be in accordance with the following:

1. The Contractor at his expense shall obtain permits and inspections required for the mechanical work on this project. Deliver all inspection certificates to the Owner’s Representative prior to final acceptance of the work.

2. Contractor shall pay all costs levied by utility companies and/or governing agencies associated with gas connections and include these costs within his bid. This shall include but not be limited to tap fees, service mains, meter, and vault charges.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. The terms “The Contractor”, when used in Division 22 shall mean the Contractor for mechanical work.

B. The term “Owners Representative” as used in Division 22 generally refers to the Architect or his designated representative in accordance with the General Conditions.

C. The term “Provide” shall mean furnish and install.

1.7 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

A. Safety Measures: The Engineer has not been retained to provide design and construction services relating to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Provide all required safety measures and consult with the State or Federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether compliance with State or Federal regulations exist.

B. Head protection: Where pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed in access ways for any maintenance, cover all such potentially injurious protrusions less than 7’-0” above the floor with padding; secure and permanently fasten, and finish to match adjacent finishes.

1.8 MECHANICAL COST BREAKDOWN

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 3

A. Cost breakdown not required.

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. The Mechanical equipment and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance unless and individual item or specification is otherwise noted as longer. The Contractor shall make-good at his own expense all defects in his work, and/or equipment furnished by him, which shall develop at any time during the one year guarantee period and shall stand any expense of cutting and patching and repairing made necessary by his corrections of unsatisfactory work or equipment operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK AND PIPING COORDINATION

A. Prior to installation of the new Division 22 systems, the Contractor shall coordinate the proposed installation with the Architectural and Structural requirements, and all other trades (including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Ceiling Suspension and Tile systems), and provide reasonable maintenance access requirements.

B. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices and other apparatus which may require adjustment or servicing.

C. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding all existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise the Owners Representative of any discrepancies between that indicated on the Drawings and that existing in the field prior to any installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the removal or relocation of installed systems that have been installed without prior notification of the Owners Representative.

2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data per the requirements of Section 013300 Submittals Procedures.

B. See individual Division 22 specification sections for additional submittal requirements.

C. Submittals of Product Data shall be bound in a black 3-ring binder with the project name on the cover. Data within this binder shall be arranged as follows:

1. Provide index tabs for each specification section in the same order and using the same name as appears in the Specifications.

2. Data shall be black and white, on 8 ½” x 11” or 11” x 17”, single, one-sided sheets suitable for copying. Diagrams and drawings larger than 11” x 17” shall be submitted in reproducible form (translucent bond paper).

3. Drawings and catalog data must be clean, neat copies. Fax material or other poor quality copies will not be acceptable.

D. If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected. Only completed submittal including all applicable specification sections will be reviewed.

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 4

E. Indicate manufacturer, trade name and model number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalogue material. Indicate sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and options actually being proposed.

F. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, and technical data sufficient to confirm that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications.

G. Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with voltage ratings and schedules.

H. Submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing. The Engineer will retain one stamped copy, one will be provided to the Architect, one will be provided to the owner and a two stamped copies will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for distribution of required number of reviewed copies to parties other than the Owner’s Representative(s).

2.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Division 01.

B. Keep on site, an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations daily. Return these drawings to the Owner’s Representative at the completion of the Project. These drawings shall not be used for any other purposes.

2.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Refer to Section 017800 Closeout Submittals.

B. See individual Division 23 specification sections for additional Operating and Maintenance Manual requirements.

2.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING/STARTUP

A. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

B. Individuals present shall include Contractors, subcontractors and equipment factory representatives. These individuals shall assist in instruction and start-up.

C. Instruction period shall occur after final inspection when systems are properly working.

D. Prepare statement and check list to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. This Statement shall read as follows:

“The Contractor, associated factory representatives and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner’s representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof.” Owner’s Representative Contractor

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 7

2.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS – STANDARDS/CODES

A. Materials used under this Contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current model line produced by the manufacturer. Each item of equipment shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials and shall conform to any applicable standards of the United States Department of Commerce.

B. Instruct the Owners representative(s) in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when the Project is turned over to the Owner.

C. All electrically driven or connected equipment shall be provided with UL or equivalent label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.

D. All control panels shall be provided with UL or equivalent Label and/or listing in accordance with the requirements of the NEC an applicable local codes.

2.7 EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to Section 012500 Substitution Procedures for product prior approval and substitution requirements.

B. Throughout these specifications and drawings, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified or scheduled by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of design and the bid.

C. Submit proposals to supply alternative materials or equipment in writing, in accordance with Section 012500 Substitution Procedures.

D. Equipment manufacturers listed in individual sections are approved alternatives for this project and are subject to requirements of drawings and specifications. Revisions required to adapt alternatives shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. Products furnished other than the (basis of design) shall have similar electrical characteristics as the scheduled or specified equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for any electrical changes caused by products not in accordance with this requirement.

2.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protect equipment and materials in storage on site, during and after installation until final acceptance. Leave factory covers in place and take special precautions to prevent entry of foreign material into working parts and duct systems.

B. Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.

C. Operate, drain and flush bearings and refill with change of lubricant before final acceptance.

D. Protect bearings and shafts during installation. Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion. Provide extended nipples for lubrication.

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 8

E. Ensure that existing equipment is carefully dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not re-use existing materials and equipment unless specifically indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATIONS

A. Coordination of Division 22 equipment and systems to the available space, with other trades. The access routes through the construction shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

B. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes and ducts, as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines and avoid structural, electrical, pipe and duct interference’s whether or not indicated on Drawings. Furnish fittings, etc., as required to make these offsets, transitions and changes in direction at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Determine exact route and location of ducts and coordinate and obtain approval for changes from the layout indicated on the drawings with the Owner’s Representative prior to fabrication.

D. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Owner’s Representative prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear.

E. All wiring, equipment, ductwork, tubing, etc., shall be concealed within building construction unless otherwise noted, or in mechanical rooms.

F. Arrange ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching of new and existing construction required for the installation of systems and equipment specified in Division 22 shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor. All cutting shall be accomplished with masonry saws, drills or similar equipment to provide neat uniform openings.

B. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings and roof with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. All patching shall meet the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

C. All cutting and patching made necessary to repair defective equipment, defective workmanship or be neglect of this Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements shall be included in Division 23.

D. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses or other structural members without the Owner Representative’s written approval.

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 9

E. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavement, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work specified or indicated under this Division is responsibility of Division 23.

3.3 SCHEDULING

A. It is understood that while drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to Owner’s Representative. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure approval from Owner’s Representative for those changes before proceeding with work.

B. Coordinate with the work of various trades when installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interference’s. Changes required in work specified in Division 22 caused by neglect to do so shall be made at no cost to Owner.

C. Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 23 unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions of the Work to those involved in sufficient time to be built into construction as the Work proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne under Division 23.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information. The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are within a Ten foot (10') radius of the indicated location. Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense.

B. Connection points to existing work shall be located and verified prior to starting new work.

C. Prior to commencing any excavation or ditching activity, the Contractor shall verify the exact location and inverts of all existing utilities and connection points in the area of his proposed excavation. Notify Owner’s representative for further direction if actual inverts will not allow the proper installation of new work.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages, which might be caused by his failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities.

3.5 PHASING AND SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. Contractor shall be aware that this is a remodel project. There will be occupied areas in the construction areas that must remain operable.

B. Work shall be bid to allow for the remodel nature of this project and the concurrent occupied areas.

C. All systems shall be fully operational to the extent that they are installed at the termination of each phase of the work.

12/1/2015

Plumbing – General Provisions Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 00 00- 10

D. System passing through existing, future, or other phase areas shall be installed, if required, to make work installed under the current phase operational.

E. All connections to and disconnection’s from existing utilities shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding with the work. Work shall be planned so as to minimize impact to areas not involved in ongoing construction. Where areas not involved in ongoing construction are to be impacted, the contractor shall identify such areas, the extent to which they will be affected and the period of time for which they will be affected. The contractor is advised that the above notification and scheduling requirement may necessitate rescheduling, partial completion and reconnection, overtime work at night or on weekends or delay of the work. Contractor costs incurred due to the above shall be included in the original bid price and shall not be the cause for additional claims or charges to the Owner.

3.6 PROJECT FINALIZATION & STARTUP

A. Upon completion of the equipment and systems installation and connections, the Contractor shall assemble all major equipment factory representatives (Exhaust fans) and subcontractors together for system start-up and Owner instructional period.

B. These individuals shall assist in start-up and check out of their systems and shall remain at the site until the system operation is acceptable and understood to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.

C. To provide acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall prepare a written statement of acceptance explaining same for the Owner's signature.

The statement should read as follows: "I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractor, have started each system and the total system and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof." Owner's Representative Contractor

D. Copies of this acceptance shall be sent to the Engineer and the Architect and one copy shall be put in each maintenance manual.

3.7 PUNCH LIST PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in wiring when the project is ready for punch lists. After punch lists are complete, written notice must be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative requesting final checkout.

B. At the time of final observation, the project foreman shall accompany the observation party and shall remove access panels as required, to allow complete observation of the entire mechanical system.

END OF SECTION 22 00 00

12/1/2015

Common Work Results for Plumbing Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 00- 1

SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Plumbing demolition. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Supports and anchorages. 8. Access doors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

1.3 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

1.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

12/1/2015

Common Work Results for Plumbing Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 00- 2

1.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

1.8 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

12/1/2015

Common Work Results for Plumbing Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 00- 3

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Section 07 72 00 "Firestopping" for materials.

O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

1.9 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

12/1/2015

Common Work Results for Plumbing Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 00- 4

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

1.10 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

1.11 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

1.12 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

1.13 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

12/1/2015

Common Work Results for Plumbing Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 00- 5

1.14 ACCESS DOORS

A. Access doors to match surrounding surface, provided with recess to accept matching finish. Provide UL rated doors in fire rated construction.

B. Provide 12”x12” access doors for maintenance or adjustments purposes for all mechanical system components including valves, volume dampers, fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, clean outs, traps and controls.

C. Refer to Section 083100 "Access Doors and Panels.”

END OF SECTION 23 05 00

12/1/2015

General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 23 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 Plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to Plumbing valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

12/1/2015

General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 23 - 2

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Brass or bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Regular.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

12/1/2015

General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 23 - 3

h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

12/1/2015

General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 23 - 4

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: One or Two piece, regular port, brass or bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc..

END OF SECTION 22 05 23

12/1/2015

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe labels.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

12/1/2015

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 05 53 - 2

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 15

feet (3.8 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

END OF SECTION 22 05 53

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Insulation Materials: a. Mineral or glass fibers.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Sealants. 5. Factory-applied jackets. 6. Field-applied jackets. 7. Tapes. 8. Securements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 2

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 3. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 3. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Factory-applied jackets shall comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 3

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing

B. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. 2. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. End caps. e. Valve covers.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

B. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel .

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each pipe system.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

J. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

K. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

L. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 5

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 6

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)

wide joint strips at end joints.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

12/1/2015

Plumbing Insulation Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 07 00 - 7

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Pipe insulation thickness shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.

B. Insulate the following piping systems:

1. Domestic Hot Water, Cold Water and Recirculation Hot Water. 2. Exposed plumbing fixtures for People with Disabilities.

END OF SECTION 22 07 00

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Flexible connectors. 3. Escutcheons.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.

C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A water tube, annealed temper.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 2

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end

copper tube.

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, setscrew or spring clips.

G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

I. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 4

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.

B. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 5

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

C. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

D. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

3.8 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass

with polished chrome-plated finish. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with

polished chrome-plated finish

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 6

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 16 - 7

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A); wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed..

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of] the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal-

joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

END OF SECTION 22 11 16

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 19 - 1

SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water hammer arresters. 8. Trap-seal primer valves.

B. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers

1. Standard: ASSE 1001. 2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 3. Body: Bronze.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 19 - 2

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 5. Finish: [Rough bronze] [Chrome plated].

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers

1. Standard: ASSE 1001. 2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 3. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 4. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers

1. Standard: ASSE 1012. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow

1. Standard: ASSE 1013. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies

1. Standard: ASSE 1015. 2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 19 - 3

2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators

1. Standard: ASSE 1003. 2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80). 4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices

1. Standard: ASSE 1017. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 3. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 6. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle. 7. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.6 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 19 - 4

2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer

1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 2. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.8 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves

1. Standard: ASSE 1018. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 3. Body: Bronze. 4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

D. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve, and pump.

E. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

F. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

12/1/2015

Domestic Water Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 11 19 - 5

G. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

H. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

I. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

END OF SECTION 22 11 19

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 16 - 1

SECTION 22 13 16

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

B. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40, solid wall.

1. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 16 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

2. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 16 - 3

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

I. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.

J. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

K. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

D. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings

is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 16 - 4

E. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION 22 13 16

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 19 - 1

SECTION 22 13 19

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 3. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected

piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Adjustable housing. 4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket 6. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 7. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 8. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 10. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 19 - 2

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 3. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 2. Pattern: Area, Floor, Funnel floor or Sanitary drain. 3. Body Material: Gray iron. 4. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel on sanitary

drains. 5. Sediment Bucket: Required on sanitary drains. 6. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 7. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze or Polished bronze. 8. Top Shape: Round for floor drains, Square for sanitary drains. 9. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: Grated strainer, or partial strainer for sanitary drains. 10. Top Loading Classification: [Extra Heavy-Duty] [Heavy Duty] [Light Duty] [Medium Duty]

<Delete if not applicable>. 11. Trap Material: Cast iron>. 12. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap. 13. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping [with increaser fitting of size indicated].

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 19 - 3

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and

100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not

greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above floor.

G. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

H. Install air-gap fittings on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

I. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

J. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

12/1/2015

Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange 22 13 19 - 4

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 22 13 19

1875 N. Lakewood Drive, Suite 201

Coeur d’Alene, ID 83814

(208) 676-8001 (208) 676-0100 Fax

SPECIFICATION STAMP PAGE

Page 1 of 1 ESP 301-01

DATE: 12/1/2015

CLIENT: Architects West, Inc. PROJECT:

Convert Baskin-Robbins to

Freshens Davis-Monthan

Exchange

210 E. Lakeside Ave. PROJECT#: 15257

Coeur d’Alene, ID 83814 ENGINEER: Wally John Beck, P.E.

James Fawson, E.I.T.

Section Specification Description

26 0010 Electrical General Provisions

26 0501 Minor Electrical Demolition

26 0519 Building Wire and Cable

26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 0534 Conduit

26 0535 Surface Raceways

26 0537 Boxes

26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 2416 Panelboards

26 2717 Equipment Wiring

26 2726 Wiring Devices

26 3353 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply

27 0010 General Provisions for Communications

27 0500 Common Work Results for Communications Systems

27 1006 Structured Cabling for Voice and Data

The technical specification sections listed above have been prepared under the direction

of the Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Idaho, whose seal and signature

appear below:

jrogers
Image

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 1

SECTION 26 00 10

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included in This Section: Provide all electrical work, labor, materials and equipment as necessary for complete operable systems, et cetera, as shown on drawings and as specified herein, including all items that are not specifically shown or stated but that are required for a complete, working installation.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: Provisions of the Bidding Requirements and Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to all Sections of Division 26.

C. Refer to other applicable sections of these specifications for related work.

1.2 STANDARDS AND CODES

A. If any conflict occurs between legally adopted codes and this specification, the codes are to prevail; this shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans or specifications which may be in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.

B. All materials and equipment installed, including lighting fixtures, shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (or other code recognized laboratory) unless otherwise permitted by the authorized code inspector and the Architect/Engineer.

C. All electrical work shall be executed in strict accordance with the latest edition of the following standards and codes and all local ordinances and regulations:

1. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

2. ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code

3. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

4. U.L. Underwriters Laboratories

D. The contractor is required to familiarize himself with the detailed requirements of these standards and any local codes and ordinances as they affect the installation of specific electric systems.

1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Division 26 Contractor shall be in full compliance with applicable provisions of all other Divisions including necessary coordination, permits, fees, submittals, et cetera. (All sections of Division 26 are a part of this requirement).

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 2

B. The Contractor shall refer to the drawings, project data, and shop drawings of other trades for additional details which affect the proper installation of the work.

C. Diagrams and symbols showing electrical connections are diagrammatic only and do not necessarily show the exact physical arrangement of the equipment UD. Unless otherwise specified or indicated

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide shall mean to furnish and install.

B. In general, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and/or on the drawings, shall be as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). Terms not specifically defined in this article shall be as defined in IEEE 100, IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms.

1.5 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and not intended to show all features of work. Do not scale drawings for equipment location. Review all architectural, structural, mechanical, and equipment drawings and adjust work to conform to conditions shown. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of dimensions, locations, and levels to suit field conditions is required by this Division.

B. Circuits and connections indicate the general character and approximate location. The layout does not necessarily show the total number of conduits for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of the conduits.

C. Any minor changes in the location of the conduits, outlets, et cetera. (to coordinate with final furniture and equipment drawings), from those shown on the plans shall be made without extra charge, if so directed in writing by the Architect/Engineer, before rough-in.

D. Contractor shall study the building drawings in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet and install electrical items in a manner to provide an aesthetic appearance. When necessary, with the architect’s written approval, outlets shall be relocated to avoid interference with structural features of the building, and to accommodate mechanical equipment.

E. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattages indicated on the plans are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other divisions of this contract and bid is based on these sizes. Overload elements shall be furnished to suit installed equipment nameplate current. Advise Architect/Engineer of any subsequent equipment changes affecting electrical circuits.

F. The electrical "legend" shown on the drawings is standardized. Use legend as reference for symbols used on plans.

1.6 SITE FAMILIARIZATION

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 3

A. Before submitting a bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all features of the building and site which may affect the execution of his work. The Contractor shall take all field measurements necessary for his work, and shall assume full responsibility for their accuracy.

1.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

A. Pay all electrical permits and fees.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer of conflicts between the documents with regulations prior to bid or commencing work.

1.8 INSPECTIONS

A. Notify Architect/Engineer (and code enforcing agencies as required) prior to covering of any concealed work; pulling of wires and cable; installation of lighting fixtures; or placing of covers on outlets, cabinets, and panelboards.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. The Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of the other contractors doing work in the building and shall examine all drawings, including the several divisions of mechanical, ventilating, structural, and general for construction details and necessary coordination.

B. Special attention is called for on the following items and all conflicts shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer before installation for decision or correction:

1. Door swings such that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door;

2. Location of fixtures, pipes, ducts and other mechanical equipment such that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical equipment are mounted in proper relationship to these items;

3. Location of cabinets and counters such that electrical work is clear from and in proper relation to these items;

4. Penetrations of building structure for electrical work;

5. Compliance to Section 110.26 of N.E.C.;

6. Coordination and provisions for maintaining lighting and power to areas in use during construction (comply with General Division Provisions).

C. When conduit, insert, or sleeves for outlet boxes and/or conduits are required, Contractor shall fully coordinate the installation thereof with other trades.

D. The electrical contractor shall take full responsibility for furnishing, installing and troubleshooting all electrical systems in the building. The electrical contractor shall be

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 4

responsible for overall coordination of all electrical systems and ensuring correct and full operation of all systems and system interfaces. The electrical contractor shall coordinate the interfaces between the electrical systems and all other systems.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for all work installed under this specification. He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense as may be necessary, any defective work, materials or parts which may show themselves defective within one year after final acceptance if said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. Lamps are not warranted, but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance.

1.11 DOCUMENTS AT JOB SITE

A. Maintain on the site, in good condition, a complete file of all reviewed design drawings and specifications, submittal data, shop drawings, et cetera. These documents shall be retained at the site until final acceptance of work and shall be made available at all times for use of the Architect/Engineer.

1.12 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Corrections and changes made during the progress of the work shall be recorded continuously on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. Accurately locate all underground and underslab conduit and stub-outs. Contractor shall also show on as-built drawings the routing of all branch panel feeders from source to panel location. At the completion of the work, this Contractor shall furnish the Architect/Engineer with (1) set of reproducible record sepias with all as-built revisions (clearly drafted) included. Final payment will not be approved until completed.

1.13 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The contractor shall prepare 5 sets of maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment and systems installed as a part of the construction project.

B. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by category with typewritten index.

C. The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, replacement parts lists, and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed under the project.

D. Detailed (as-built) diagrams for each system shall be included for the specific system installed under the contract.

E. The completed manuals shall be bound with hard board covers. The covers shall be identified with the name of the Project, Division 26 Contractor, and Year of Completion.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 5

F. A preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 30 days prior to completion of the project for checking and approval. Three bound copies shall be delivered to Architect prior to final acceptance of project.

1.14 PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

A. Whenever any material or equipment is specified by patent or proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specification shall establish the standard of quality in that particular field of manufacture. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole and final judge as to quality and acceptability of substitutions, no exceptions.

B. The successful electrical contractor will be responsible to provide and install equal products to those specified. If proposed substitutions are not equal, it will be the responsibility of the electrical contractor to provide an approved equal product at no extra cost to the project.

C. When the substitute equipment or material necessitates revisions to the plans or involves other trades, the contractor shall include drawings and details showing all such changes, coordinate and assume any liability and costs from the affected trades. Also, if a change requires engineering or mechanical services or other equipment modifications, these services shall be billable to the contractor. If contractor installs any devices or associated equipment (which are subject to submittal review) prior to submittal approval, it will be his responsibility to make any changes required to comply (if necessary) with approved equipment.

D. Any request for substitution for special systems; i.e., fire alarm, intercom, et cetera, shall be accompanied with a separate sheet listing, by section and paragraph number, compliance with these specifications. Where the substitute item differs in any manner from the specified item that difference shall be noted and the difference described. Failure to comply with this paragraph shall be justification for disapproval.

E. Contractor shall provide photometric and computerized print-outs and sample devices or fixtures, if requested by Architect/Engineer, with submittals for proposed substitutions.

1.15 SUBMITTAL LITERATURE

A. Submittals, General: All equipment and materials must be submitted for review and approval prior to installation. Provide submittals in accordance with Division I, Submittals. The remaining instructions in this paragraph are intended to supplement and amplify the requirements of the referenced section above.

1. Bind submittals in stiff paper folder with fastening clips. Fold drawings to 8-1/2" size and bind as above or place in "pocket" of folder. Index to the applicable specification section with a transmittal letter bound as the first sheet. Submittals will not be accepted unless they conform to these requirements.

B. List of Manufacturers: Submit list of materials and manufacturers within 30 days after contract award. The list shall contain items to be used on this project, listing manufacturer's name and catalog numbers (where applicable) and referenced to the applicable specification paragraph.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 6

C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings, descriptive bulletins, data sheets, diagrams, catalog cuts, or other additional information as required for the following (but not limited to) specified items:

1. Submittal Format: Submittals must be sent in complete "sets," i.e., all fixtures in one submittal, all panels and transformers in one submittal.

2. Review: The review of a manufacturer's name or product by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.16 DEMONSTRATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. During final inspection, conduct an operating test for approval by Architect/Engineer. Demonstrate installation in accordance with the Contract Documents. Should any portion of the installation fail to meet requirements of Contract Documents, repair or replace items failing to meet requirements until items can be demonstrated to comply and be approved by Architect/Engineer.

B. If requested by Architect/Engineer, contractor shall ensure that instruments and personnel are available for measuring light intensities, voltage and current values, and for demonstrating continuity, grounds, or open circuit conditions.

1.17 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall furnish a breakdown of the Division 26 work as indicated in the following Schedule of Values:

1. General (Mobilization, Equipment Rental, etc.)

Transformers, Material

Transformers, Labor

Switchgear, Material

Switchgear, Labor

Distribution Panels, Material

Distribution Panels, Labor

Panelboards, Material

Panelboards, Labor

Cable Tray, Materials

Cable Tray, Labor

Trenching, Excavation, and Backfill, Material

Trenching, Excavation, and Backfill, Labor

Wiring Devices, Material

Wiring Devices, Labor

Equipment Connections, Material

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 7

Equipment Connections, Labor

Generator/ATS, Material

Generator/ATS, Labor

UPS, Material

UPS, Labor

Luminaires, Material

Luminaires, Labor

Site Lighting Pole Base, Material

Site Lighting Pole Base, Labor

Lighting Control Panels, Material

Lighting Control Panels, Labor

Branch Circuit Wiring, Material

Branch Circuit Wiring, Labor

Primary and Secondary Feeder, Material

Primary and Secondary Feeder, Labor

Utility Transformer Pad, Material

Utility Transformer Pad, Labor

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All products, materials, and equipment shall be new, UL listed and free from any defects.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Any opening or penetration required for installation of electrical equipment, conduit, etc., shall be coordinated by the Contractor. All cutting and patching shall be subject to approval of Architect/Engineer.

3.2 TEMPORARY/CONSTRUCTION POWER

A. Provide temporary/construction power for the duration of the project. Refer to Division 1 of the general conditions for specific requirements.

3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OUTAGES

A. Any electrical system outage; power, fire alarm, security, sound, etc., required to perform work under this project shall be performed at a time that is convenient to the owner. Submit to the owner, in writing, for his approval, a schedule showing the dates and times the Contractor

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 8

desires to perform his work. This schedule shall be submitted to the owner five days prior to commencing work. It may be necessary to perform this work at night, on holidays or maintenance shutdowns. The Contractor shall include in his bid all premium time labor costs for this work.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish and debris at all times. Surplus material, tools and equipment must not be stored at the job site. At the completion of the job, all equipment and fixtures shall be left clean and in proper condition for their intended use.

B. Removal of refuse, debris, cuttings, packaging, cartons, etc. for work provided under Division 26-28 shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26-28.

C. Cleanup shall be done continually during construction, at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, occupants, workmen, the premise and adjacent property.

D. Removal of refuse, debris, cuttings, packaging, cartons, etc. for work provided under Division 26-28 shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26-28.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touch-up electrical equipment with factory finished surfaces as required by the Architect/Engineer using matching factory furnished paint. Coordinate field painting requirements with the Architect/Engineer prior to final trim and cover installation. Do not paint screw heads, hinges, nameplates, hardware etc.

3.6 POWER CONNECTIONS AND PHASE ROTATION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall make all power connections to all electrical motor starters or controllers (provided in Divisions 22 and 23) and devices (such as kitchen equipment, HVAC, etc.) provided by owner or other divisions where shown on drawings. Proper phase rotation shall be maintained at all times. The contractor shall provide a phase rotation meter, check, and identify proper rotation of equipment prior to energizing equipment.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide concrete bases and housekeeping pads for electrical equipment including pole bases, transformer bases, unit substation base, et cetera. Equipment pads shall be a minimum of 4" high, with a minimum of 2" extending beyond equipment. Transformer bases shall be a minimum of 4" high and extend a minimum of 4" beyond transformer base in each direction. Edges shall be chamfered.

3.8 FIRE BARRIERS

A. This contractor shall review the architectural drawings to determine the location of all fire barriers (walls, floors, et cetera). All openings for conduits, cables, ducts, et cetera. penetrating

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Electrical General Provisions 26 00 10 - 9

any fire barrier shall be sealed with an approved fire stop product. The product shall be approved for the size opening to be sealed.

B. Review the mechanical drawings for all fire dampers to be installed in the fire barriers. Provide electrical power connections to all fire dampers shown on the mechanical drawings. Fire dampers shall be connected to the fire alarm control panel to indicate the damper has been activated.

3.9 TESTING

A. General: The contractor shall test all wiring and all electrical equipment installed in this contract to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. All instruments and personnel required to conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. If the test results indicate corrective measures are required, the Contractor shall undertake all such corrective measures until the electrical system is accepted by the Engineer. No additional compensation will be paid for corrective measures.

END OF SECTION 26 00 10

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Minor Electrical Demolition 26 05 01 - 1

SECTION 26 05 01

MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical demolition.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements pertinent to alterations work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

B. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.

C. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. Coordinate with all other trades and abatement contractors prior to commencement of work.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Minor Electrical Demolition 26 05 01 - 2

2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Notify local fire service.

3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance.

4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Notify telephone utility company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system.

3. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Recycle and/or dispose of lamps and ballasts in accordance with all Federal, State, and local regulations concerning mercury and PCB's.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Minor Electrical Demolition 26 05 01 - 3

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. See Division 01 for Construction Waste Management and Disposal requirements.

B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.

C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

D. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts.

END OF SECTION 26 05 01

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Service entrance cable.

C. Metal-clad cable.

D. Wiring connectors.

E. Electrical tape.

F. Heat shrink tubing.

G. Oxide inhibiting compound.

H. Wire pulling lubricant.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 07) for requirements pertinent to firestopping.

B. Section 26 0501 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing electrical conductors and cables.

C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Branch Circuit Wiring:

1. Basis of Measurement: Per lineal foot.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery, and installation of branch circuit wiring.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 2

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010.

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).

E. ASTM B800 - Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes - Annealed and Intermediate Tempers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).

F. ASTM B801 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Subsequent Covering of Insulation; 2007 (Reapproved 2012).

G. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.

H. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.

I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

J. NECA 104 - Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building Wire and Cable; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2012 (NECA/AA 104).

K. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

L. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).

M. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

O. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 3

T. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

V. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other potential conflicts.

3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors.

D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 4

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect/Engineer and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Service entrance cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

a. For overhead service drop, installed in raceway to service head.

b. For underground service entrance, installed in raceway.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where exposed to damage.

F. Armored cable is not permitted.

G. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires.

1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls and above accessible ceilings for branch circuits up to 20 A.

1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from first outlet to panelboard.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.

b. Where exposed to view.

c. Where exposed to damage.

d. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for those locations.

e. For isolated ground circuits, unless provided with an additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 5

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.

D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

H. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable tray use.

I. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant.

J. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air plenums.

K. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated or permitted for substitution. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum.

a. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is permitted, when approved by Owner and authority having jurisdiction, only for the following:

1) Services: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.

2) Feeders: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger.

b. Where aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, comply with the following:

1) Size aluminum conductors to provide, when compared to copper sizes indicated, equivalent or greater ampacity and equivalent or less voltage drop.

2) Increase size of raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. as required to accommodate aluminum conductors.

3) Provide aluminum equipment grounding conductor sized according to NFPA 70.

4) Equip electrical distribution equipment with compression lugs for terminating aluminum conductors.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 6

4. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution): AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated.

L. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions:

1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.

3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

M. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

N. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.

e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.

f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

g. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.

2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 7

D. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN, except as indicated below.

a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.

b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.

c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution): Type XHHW-2.

2.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Service Entrance Cable for Above-Ground Use: NFPA 70, Type SE multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 854, Style R or Style U as indicated.

B. Service Entrance Cable for Underground Use: NFPA 70, Type USE single-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 854, Type USE-2, and with UL 44, Type RHH/RHW-2.

C. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

2.5 METAL-CLAD CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.

E. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.

1. Provide additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor where indicated or required.

F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.

G. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location.

2.6 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 8

B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use compression connectors.

3. Connectors for Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors.

C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors for all connections.

D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation.

E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.

F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

G. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

2.7 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

5. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without adhesive, oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum thickness of 7 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

6. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 9

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed.

D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.

5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

9. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below.

a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers.

b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated neutral bus.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 10

D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104.

E. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.

F. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Exposed Cable Installation (only where specifically permitted):

1. Route cables parallel or perpendicular to building structural members and surfaces.

2. Protect cables from physical damage.

H. Direct Burial Cable Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling.

2. Install cable with minimum cover of 24 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. Protect cables from damage in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire cable length.

I. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

J. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.

K. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.

b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.

L. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

M. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

N. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 11

O. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

P. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer.

6. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

7. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

Q. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.

a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, first apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.

a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

R. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

S. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

T. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.

U. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified.

V. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19 - 12

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Division 01.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION 26 05 19

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

D. Ground bars.

E. Ground rod electrodes.

F. Ground access wells.

G. Grounding and bonding components.

H. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:

1. Existing metal underground water pipe.

2. Metal underground water pipe.

3. Metal frame of the building.

4. Concrete-encased electrode.

5. Existing metal underground gas piping system.

6. Metal underground gas piping system.

7. Rod electrodes.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 03) for Concrete Reinforcing and Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 33) for Site Grounding

C. Section 26 0519 - Building Wire and Cable: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System; 1983.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 2

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

G. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.

3. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

D. Field quality control test reports.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 3

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect/Engineer. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

F. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system.

a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.

b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):

a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 4

c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal Building or Structure Frame:

a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.

4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:

a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

5. Ground Ring:

a. Provide a ground ring encircling the building or structure consisting of bare copper conductor not less than 2 AWG in direct contact with earth, installed at a depth of not less than 30 inches.

b. Where location is not indicated, locate ground ring conductor at least 24 inches outside building perimeter foundation.

6. Ground Rod Electrode(s):

a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise indicated or required.

b. Space electrodes not less than 20 feet from each other and any other ground electrode.

c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.

7. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance.

8. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.

a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to:

a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 5

b. Metal gas piping.

8. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.

9. Provide bonding for metal building frame where not used as a grounding electrode.

10. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame.

11. Provide bonding and equipment grounding for pools and fountains and associated equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.

12. Provide redundant grounding and bonding for patient care areas of health care facilities in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99.

H. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:

1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination.

a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required.

b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated or required.

c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 0519:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:

1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.

2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Ground Bars:

1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.

2. Size: As indicated.

3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.

E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 6

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Ground Access Wells:

1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.

2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches.

4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".

2.3 ELECTRODES

A. Rod Electrodes: Copper.

1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.

2. Length: 10 feet.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.

B. Wire: Stranded copper.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

D. Grounding Well:

1. Well Pipe: 8 inch by 24 inch long clay tile pipe with belled end.

2. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

E. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 7

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates.

D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.

F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.

G. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade.

H. Install 4 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.

I. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together.

J. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.

K. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object entering space under access floors. Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use 2 AWG bare copper conductor.

L. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic cash registers.

M. Provide grounding and bonding in patient care areas to meet requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 70.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 8

N. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Division 01.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.

B. Conduit and equipment supports.

C. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 03) for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 05) for Metal Fabrications.

C. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.

D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated, where applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.

d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

F. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.

2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing.

G. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.

7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

8. Wood: Use wood screws.

9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

10. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.

11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.

a. Comply with MFMA-4.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 4

b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts.

3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners.

4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.

5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.

6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.

7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect/Engineer, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect/Engineer, do not provide support from roof deck.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 5

F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

G. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

H. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0534.

I. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0537.

J. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.

K. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5600.

L. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

M. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

N. Remove temporary supports.

O. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

2. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

P. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

Q. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

R. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.

S. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 6

B. See Division 01 for additional quality requirements.

C. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

D. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 1

SECTION 26 05 34

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

G. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT).

H. Conduit fittings.

I. Accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 03) for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 07) for Firestopping.

C. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 31) for Excavation, Trenching, and Fill.

D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.

E. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways.

G. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

H. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 2

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

F. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2003.

G. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.

I. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.

J. NEMA TC 13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 3

R. UL 886 - Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

T. UL 1653 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.

5. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 4

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit.

3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or rigid PVC conduit.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground.

5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows or concrete encased PVC elbows for bends.

6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection.

7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges.

D. Embedded Within Concrete:

1. Within Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or rigid PVC conduit.

2. Within Slab Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or rigid PVC conduit.

3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or rigid PVC conduit.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from concrete.

E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 5

H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas.

K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). IMC conduit shall not be used in sizes larger than 4".

L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.

4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.

b. Motors.

O. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 2100.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 6

C. Communications Systems Conduits: Also comply with Section 27 1005.

D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.

E. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

G. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or approved by Engineer:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4" trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4" trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 3/4" trade size.

4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/4" trade size.

5. Underground, Interior: 1" trade size.

6. Underground, Exterior: 1" trade size.

H. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 7

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

2.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

2.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

B. Fittings:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 8

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

2.8 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

B. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.9 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type ENT electrical nonmetallic tubing complying with NEMA TC 13 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1653.

B. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of ENT to be connected.

2. Use solvent-welded type fittings.

3. Solvent-Welded Fittings: Rigid PVC fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; suitable for use with ENT.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 9

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.

E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.

F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

F. Install electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) in accordance with NECA 111.

G. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.

b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 10

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:

a. Across floors.

b. Across roofs.

c. Across top of parapet walls.

d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points.

9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:

a. Heaters.

b. Hot water piping.

c. Flues.

13. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.

H. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 11

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.

a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where approved).

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

I. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

J. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 12

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.

6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

K. Underground Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323.

2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.

b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased.

L. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):

1. Include proposed conduit arrangement with submittals.

2. Maximum Conduit Size: 1 inch (27 mm) unless otherwise approved.

3. Minimum Conduit Spacing: As determined and approved by Structural Engineer..

4. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete.

M. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 13

N. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations, provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.

O. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

P. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers.

Q. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

S. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Conduit 26 05 34 - 14

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 34

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Surface Raceways 26 05 35 - 1

SECTION 26 05 35

SURFACE RACEWAYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface raceway systems.

B. Wireways.

C. Wall duct.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

D. UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. UL 5A - Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 111 - Outline of Investigation for Multi-outlet Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Surface Raceways 26 05 35 - 2

G. UL 870 - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 and conduit provided under Section 26 0534 as required for installation of raceways provided under this section.

3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components to be installed.

4. Wall Duct: Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted wall duct where indicated.

5. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for administrative requirements pertaining to submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, service condition requirements, and accessories.

1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and cables.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Surface Raceways 26 05 35 - 3

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL), Intertek (ETL), or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2.2 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. MonoSystems, Inc: www.monosystems.com.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us.

4. See Division 01 for product substitution requirements.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5A.

D. Multioutlet Assemblies: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 111.

2.3 WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.

2. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com.

3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

4. See Division 01 for product substitution requirements.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Surface Raceways 26 05 35 - 4

B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870.

C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R, painted steel with screw-cover; include provision for padlocking.

D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Wireway Size: 4 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Division 01 for additional quality requirements.

B. Factory test each production unit for pre-wired surface raceway systems to verify proper wiring.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and are properly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install raceways in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install raceways plumb and level.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Surface Raceways 26 05 35 - 5

D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Close unused raceway openings.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Division 01 for additional quality requirements

B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects.

C. Surface Raceway Systems with Integrated Devices: Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity.

D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION 26 05 35

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 1

SECTION 26 05 37

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.

C. Floor boxes.

D. Underground boxes/enclosures.

E. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

F. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 03) for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points.

E. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways:

F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

G. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.

2. Floor box service fittings.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 2

3. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77).

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 3

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated.

8. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for administrative requirements pertinent to submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE 77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES

A. General Requirements:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 4

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required.

6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.

9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.

11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multi-gang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 5

12. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

D. Floor Boxes:

1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in accordance with Section 26 2726; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

2. Use cast iron floor boxes within slab on grade.

3. Use sheet-steel or cast iron floor boxes within slab above grade.

4. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to and after concrete pour).

5. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings.

E. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches.

4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.

5. Applications:

a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Non-deliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8 load rating.

b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Non-deliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 15 load rating.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 6

c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic.

6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.

a. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.

2.3 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Boxes: Hubbell recessed 4 or 8 gang box appropriate for floor construction type sized to accommodate receptacle configuration as indicated on power and special systems drawings. Trim to be coordinated with and accommodate a floor covering insert at each location. Trim color to be selected by Architect / Interior Designer.

B. Material: Formed steel.

C. Shape: Rectangular.

2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.

2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

C. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes:

1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.

2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

D. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted.

H. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels as required where approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.

b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 1005.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 8

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.

9. Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire-resistance will not be reduced.

a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual non-communicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.

b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 0534.

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:

a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.

b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

c. Electrical rooms.

d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

I. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 9

4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.

J. Install boxes plumb and level.

K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad.

M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.

O. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.

2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.

3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.

4. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.

P. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

Q. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified.

R. Close unused box openings.

S. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

T. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 10

U. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.

V. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

W. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.

X. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717.

Y. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.

Z. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.

AA. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726.

AB. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

AC. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

AD. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

AE. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

AF. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

AG. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

AH. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

AI. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

AJ. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

AK. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

AL. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

AM. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

AN. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.

1. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 11

2. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in fire rated walls.

AO. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

AP. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

AQ. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

AR. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

AS. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

AT. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

AU. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

AV. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

AW. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.

AX. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

AY. Set floor boxes level.

AZ. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.

BA. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Boxes 26 05 37 - 12

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION 26 05 37

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Underground warning tape.

F. Floor marking tape.

G. Warning signs and labels.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 09) for Painting and Coating.

B. Section 26 0519 - Building Wire and Cable: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2012.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed.

2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain whose designations are changed as part of the new work.

B. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.

a. Switchboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3

5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

b. Motor Control Centers:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.

5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

c. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate.

5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.

6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

d. Transformers:

1) Identify kVA rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

4) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4

e. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:

1) Identify voltage and phase.

2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

f. Busway:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

4) Provide identification at maximum intervals of 40 feet.

5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each plug-in unit. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

g. Time Switches:

1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location.

h. Enclosed Contactors:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location.

i. Transfer Switches:

1) Identify voltage and phase.

2) Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source and standby power source. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.

2. Service Equipment:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5

a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.

b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

c. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed.

3. Emergency System Equipment:

a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.

b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of on-site emergency power sources.

c. Use identification nameplate to identify emergency operating instructions for emergency system equipment.

4. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical equipment.

5. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Use identification nameplate to identify switchboards and panelboards utilizing a high leg delta system in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means.

8. Use handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.

9. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

10. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction.

a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white strips, 3 inches wide, painted in accordance with Division 09.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6

11. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.

b. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment-specific data:

1) Include orange header that reads "WARNING" where calculated incident energy is less than 40 calories per square cm.

2) Include red header that reads "DANGER" where calculated incident energy is 40 calories per square cm or greater.

3) Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or approved equivalent.

4) Include the following information:

(a) Arc flash protection boundary.

(b) Incident energy.

(c) Hazard/risk category.

(d) PPE (personnel protective equipment) requirements.

(e) Nominal voltage.

(f) Shock hazard condition.

(g) Limited approach boundary.

(h) Restricted approach boundary.

(i) Prohibited approach boundary.

(j) Equipment identification.

(k) Date calculations were performed.

12. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 7

the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

13. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

14. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

15. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.

2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 1005.

3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:

a. At each source and load connection.

b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.

c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.

d. In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

5. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.

D. Identification for Raceways:

1. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 8

a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide.

1) Color Code:

(a) Emergency Power System:

(1) Life Safety Branch: Red and white striped.

(2) Critical Branch: Orange.

(3) Equipment Branch: Yellow.

(b) Fire Alarm System: Red.

2) Field-Painting: Comply with Division 09.

3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519.

2. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.

3. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.

4. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for cable tray containing conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP AWAY" at maximum intervals of 10 feet.

E. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system.

a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 9000 per the same color code used for raceways.

b. For exposed boxes in public areas, do not color code.

2. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

F. Identification for Devices:

1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 1005.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 9

2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726.

3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.

a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate.

4. Use engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.

2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.

a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches.

3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.

a. Use only for indoor locations.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 10

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:

a. System designation where applicable:

1) Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY".

2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM".

b. Equipment designation or other approved description.

c. Other information as indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:

a. System Designation: 1 inch.

b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.

c. Other Information: 1/4 inch.

d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above floor or working platform.

5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

b. Emergency Power System: as follows.

1) Life Safety Branch: Red text on white background.

2) Critical Branch: Black text on orange background.

3) Equipment Branch: Black text on yellow background.

c. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 11

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.

B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

C. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.

3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

D. Legend:

1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

2. Markers for System Identification:

a. Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY".

b. Other Systems: Type of service.

E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 12

2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection.

C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

D. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange background.

2.6 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes.

2.7 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 13

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.

8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.

9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 14

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Division 01 for additional quality requirements.

B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Power distribution panelboards.

B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 03) for Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Distribution Panels:

1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery and installation of panel and feeder.

B. Panelboards:

1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery and installation of panel and feeder.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision E, 2013.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 2

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2009.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

E. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.

F. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

G. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1).

H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 3

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

5. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for administrative requirements pertinent to submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements.

E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Division 01 for addition provisions pertinent to product requirements.

2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.

3. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 4

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards:

1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

2. Panelboards Containing Fusible Switches: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.

C. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

D. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

E. See Division 01 for product substitution requirements.

F. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 ALL PANELBOARDS

A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 5

2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

b. Panelboards Containing Fusible Switches: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated or where isolated grounding conductors are provided.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.

a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.

b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, gutter taps, or oversized lugs are provided.

3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 6

b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.

c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

J. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices are provided, list and label panelboards as a complete assembly including surge protective device.

K. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053.

1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.

a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.

b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.

c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

L. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination.

M. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.

N. Load centers are not acceptable.

O. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

1. Feed-through lugs.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 7

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:

1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 8

2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Fusible Switches:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying with NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. Provide means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

4. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Provide compression lugs where indicated.

c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 9

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:

1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.

2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.

b. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.

5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units.

a. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:

1) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial.

2) Long time delay.

3) Short time pickup and delay.

4) Instantaneous pickup.

5) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

b. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

c. Provide communication capability where indicated: Compatible with system indicated.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 10

6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:

a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.

b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment.

c. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699.

8. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits serving fluorescent lighting.

9. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all branch circuits serving HID lighting.

10. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

11. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.

12. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 11

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.

E. Install panelboards plumb.

F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered.

G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

H. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad with chamfered edges. Exceed panelboard footprint by 3 inches in each direction.

I. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus.

2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus.

K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

L. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated.

M. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent protective device coordination study performed according to Section 26 0573.

N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.

O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

P. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing essential loads where indicated. Also provide for the following:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 12

1. Emergency and night lighting circuits.

2. Fire detection and alarm circuits.

3. Communications equipment circuits.

4. Intrusion detection and access control system circuits.

5. Video surveillance system circuits.

Q. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Division 01.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70.

E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

H. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Panelboards 26 24 16 - 13

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Equipment Wiring 26 27 17 - 1

SECTION 26 27 17

EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

B. Section 26 0519 - Building Wire and Cable.

C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:

1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.

2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Equipment Wiring 26 27 17 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for administrative requirements pertinent to submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multi-conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 262818 and in individual equipment sections.

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.

D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.

F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537.

2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Refer to project drawings for connection requirements for each piece of Equipment. Any conflicts found between the Mechanical and Electrical drawings are to be reported to the Electrical Engineer prior to continuation of work for resolution.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Equipment Wiring 26 27 17 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings.

END OF SECTION 26 27 17

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches.

B. Wall dimmers.

C. Receptacles.

D. Wall plates.

E. Floor box service fittings.

F. Poke-through assemblies.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Building Wire and Cable.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways: Surface raceway systems, including multi-outlet assemblies.

D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Wiring Devices:

1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Completion of rough-in, installation and adjustment of device and faceplate, installation of branch circuit to device.

B. Equipment Connections:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2

1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Completion of rough-in, installation and adjustment of connection, installation of local disconnect, installation of branch circuit to device.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections.

6. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for additional information regarding administrative requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

2. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes, and diagnostics information.

C. Samples: One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified.

D. Certificates for Surge Protection Receptacles: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for compliance with UL 1449.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4

2. GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing procedures and intervals.

3. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Division 01 for additional provisions pertinent to product requirements.

2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws: Two for each type of screw.

3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type.

4. Extra Surge Protection Receptacles: Two of each type.

5. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish.

6. Extra Flush Floor Service Fittings: Two of each type.

7. Extra Poke-Through Core Hole Closure Plugs: Two for each core size.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 5

C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

D. Substitutions: See Division 01 for additional information regarding closeout submittals.

E. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units.

E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

F. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed in kitchens.

G. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

H. Provide isolated ground receptacles for all receptacles serving computers and electronic cash registers.

I. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

J. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.

K. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.3 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes:

1. All Wiring Devices: White with white nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated.

2. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: Ivory with ivory nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 6

4. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover unless otherwise indicated.

5. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange with isolated ground triangle mark on device face.

6. Surge Protection Receptacles: Blue.

7. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate.

8. Above-Floor Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with satin aluminum housing.

9. Flush Floor Box Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and ring/flange.

10. Flush Poke-Through Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and aluminum flange.

2.4 WALL SWITCHES

A. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

C. Lighted Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load off; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

D. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

E. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; all switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

F. Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with toggle type three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 7

G. Locking Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; all switches keyed alike; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.

H. Keyed Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with keyed toggle switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings..

2.5 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system as specified in Section 26 0943, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

3. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498 Supplement SD, with green dot hospital grade mark on device face.

C. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap; isolated ground triangle mark on device face; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

3. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 8

4. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFCI Receptacles:

1. All GFCI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.

a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

4. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.

5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

E. Surge Protection Receptacles:

1. All Surge Protection Receptacles: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1449, Type 2 or 3.

a. Energy Dissipation: Not less than 240 J per mode.

b. Protected Modes: L-N, L-G, N-G.

c. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): Not more than 700 V for L-N, L-G modes and 1200 V for N-G mode.

d. Diagnostics:

1) Visual Notification: Provide indicator light to report functional status of surge protection.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 9

2) Audible Notification: Provide switchable audible alarm to report that surge protection is not functional.

2. Standard Surge Protection Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Isolated Ground Surge Protection Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap.

F. Locking Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, configuration as indicated on the drawings.

1. Standard Locking Convenience Receptacles: Single, 20A, 125V, NEMA L5-20R.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.

2. Size: Standard.

3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

4. Provide screwless wallplates with concealed mounting hardware where indicated.

B. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.

C. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.

D. Brass Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation.

E. Aluminum Wall Plates: Smooth satin finish, clear anodized, factory-coated to inhibit oxidation.

F. Chrome Wall Plates: Smooth finish, chrome plated steel.

G. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.

H. Pre-marked Wall Plates: Factory labeled as indicated; hot stamped for nylon wall plates and engraved for metal wall plates.

I. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 10

J. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

2.7 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0537 with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

B. Above-Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Pedestal Convenience Receptacles:

a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2. Single Service Pedestal Communications Outlets:

a. Configuration: One 1 inch bushed opening.

b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

3. Single Service Pedestal Furniture Feed:

a. Configuration: One 3/4 inch knockout.

4. Dual Service Pedestal Combination Outlets:

a. Configuration:

1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2) Communications: One 1 inch bushed opening.

3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

b. Provide barrier to separate line and low voltage compartments.

C. Flush Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Flush Convenience Receptacles:

a. Cover: Rectangular.

b. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).

2. Single Service Flush Communications Outlets:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 11

a. Cover: Rectangular.

b. Configuration: As indicated on drawings..

c. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

3. Single Service Flush Furniture Feed:

a. Cover: Rectangular.

b. Configuration: One 2-1/8 inch by 3/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).

4. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:

a. Cover: Rectangular.

b. Configuration:

1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).

2) Communications: As indicated on drawings..

3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

5. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed:

a. Cover: Rectangular.

b. Configuration:

1) Power: One 2-1/8 inch by 3/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).

2) Communications: One 2-1/8 inch by 1 inch combination threaded opening(s).

6. Accessories:

a. Tile Rings: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers.

b. Carpet Flanges: Finish to match covers; configuration as required to accommodate specified covers.

2.8 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 12

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Assembly comprising floor service fitting, poke-through component, fire stops and smoke barriers, and junction box for conduit termination; fire rating listed to match fire rating of floor and suitable for floor thickness where installed.

C. Above-Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Pedestal Convenience Receptacles:

a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2. Single Service Pedestal Communications Outlets:

a. Configuration: One 1 inch bushed opening.

b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

3. Single Service Pedestal Furniture Feed:

a. Configuration: One 3/4 inch knockout.

4. Dual Service Pedestal Combination Outlets:

a. Configuration:

1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.

2) Communications: One 1 inch bushed opening.

3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

b. Provide barrier to separate line and low voltage compartments.

D. Flush Floor Service Fittings:

1. Single Service Flush Convenience Receptacles:

a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap opening(s).

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 13

2. Single Service Flush Communications Outlets:

a. Configuration: As indicated on drawings..

b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

3. Single Service Flush Furniture Feed:

a. Configuration: One 2 inch by 1-1/4 inch combination threaded opening(s).

4. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:

a. Cover: Hinged door(s).

b. Configuration:

1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s).

2) Communications: As indicated on drawings..

3) Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.

5. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed:

a. Configuration:

1) Power: One 3/4 inch threaded opening(s).

2) Communications: Two 1/2 inch threaded opening(s).

6. Accessories:

a. Closure Plugs: Size and fire rating as required to seal unused core hole and maintain fire rating of floor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 14

E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.

F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.

H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.

I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section.

1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.

b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor.

c. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor.

d. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter/backsplash.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, wall dimmers, or telecommunication outlets are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, telecommunication outlets, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, align devices vertically.

5. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect/Engineer to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 15

6. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, GFCI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFCI protection.

J. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

K. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

L. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

M. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.

O. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

P. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 16

R. Install poke-through closure plugs in all unused core holes to maintain fire rating of floor.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

C. Operate each wall switch and wall dimmer with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Inspect each surge protection receptacle to verify surge protection is active.

G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 1

SECTION 26 33 53

STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Charger/rectifier unit.

B. Inverter unit.

C. Batteries.

1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Uninterruptible Power Supply:

1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery and installation of UPS and associated feeders and branch circuitry.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 519 - IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 1992 (R 2004).

B. NEMA PE 1 - Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Specification and Performance Verification; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for submittal administrative requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Provide battery rack dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and weight; detailed equipment outlines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit entry and exit; single-line diagram indicating metering, control, and external wiring requirements; heat rejection and air flow requirements.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 2

C. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. Include equipment installation outline, connection diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for installation.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Operation Data: Description of operating procedures.

G. Maintenance Data: Description of servicing procedures; list of major components; recommended remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect equipment from extreme temperature and humidity by storing in a conditioned space.

B. Protect equipment from dust and debris by wrapping unit in dusttight cover and storing away from construction activity.

C. Deliver batteries no sooner than 7 days before charging.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not store or install unless temperature is maintained between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F, at a relative humidity less than 95 percent (non-condensing).

B. Maintain conditions during and after installation of products.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year warranty including coverage for batteries.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc: www.meau.com.

B. Toshiba Corporation: www.toshiba.com.

C. Substitutions: See Division 01 for Product Requirements.

D. Basis of Design: APC SMT3000 or approved equal.

2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

A. System Configuration: Non-redundant type with reverse transfer. Designed for capacity expansion by addition of parallel modules in field with minimum downtime.

B. Components:

1. Battery.

2. Rectifier/charger to maintain battery charge and to provide input to inverter when utility power is available.

3. Inverter to provide power to load during normal operation.

4. Static switch to transfer load automatically and without disturbance between inverter and utility power.

5. Manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance.

6. Input and output isolation transformers and filters to provide appropriate isolation and disturbance attenuation.

7. Monitors, sensors, and control circuits.

C. Design Standards: IEEE 519 and NEMA PE 1.

2.3 SYSTEM RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

A. System Continuous Rating: As indicated on Drawings, over entire battery voltage range at specified power factor. Maintain output voltage within specified limits at any load from full load to no-load.

B. Battery Capacity: Capable of operating at full load for 1 hour.

C. Voltage Rating: 120/208 volts, 1 phase.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 4

D. Input Voltage Operating Range: Plus or minus 10 percent.

E. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz. Plus or minus 3 Hz.

F. Input Current Limit: Adjustable to maximum of 125 percent of that required to operate at full load with battery bank on float charge.

G. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100 percent in fifteen seconds.

H. UPS Power Factor Over Full Range of Loads and Input Voltages: 74 to 100 percent, lagging.

I. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Wave Form: 5 percent maximum at full load.

J. Output Free Running Frequency: 60 Hz Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

K. Output Harmonic Distortion: Maximum 5 percent rms total harmonic distortion (THD) and maximum 3 percent any single harmonic, at rated frequency and voltage, from 10 percent load to full load and over battery voltage range, measured into a linear load.

L. Voltage Transient Response for Application of 0 to 50 Percent, 50 to 100 Percent, 100 to 50 Percent, and 50 to 0 Percent Step Loads, and Transfer To and From Bypass Line:

1. Plus 8, minus 10 percent for maximum of 8.3 milliseconds.

2. Plus or minus 5 percent for maximum of 25 milliseconds.

3. Plus or minus 3 percent for maximum of 50 milliseconds.

4. Recovery to steady state within 100 milliseconds after any out-of-tolerance variation.

M. Phase Displacement:

1. 120 plus or minus 1 degrees for balanced loads.

2. 120 plus or minus 4 degrees for 50 percent unbalanced loads.

N. Output Current Limit: 150 percent of rated output current.

O. Voltage Unbalance: 3 percent maximum line-line with 100 percent load unbalance.

P. Efficiency: 98 percent at full load, 98 percent at 25 percent load, minimum. Measure efficiency of unit including battery and isolation transformer losses.

2.4 DESIGN

A. Inverter Type: Pulse-width modulated.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 5

B. Rectifier/Charger Capacity: Sufficient to supply full load to inverter while recharging fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of full capacity in four hours or less; and within the input current limits specified.

C. Provide means for on-line testing of UPS, including test points to allow adjusting and servicing. Provide means for testing static switch while load is bypassed to utility.

D. Mean Time Between Failures: 60,000 hours, minimum.

E. Cooling: Natural convection.

F. Forced Air Cooled Unit: Provide with redundant cooling so that failure of any one cabinet cooling fan or fan circuit will not affect continued operation at full load and ambient temperature of 77 degrees F or lower.

G. Operate battery floating, isolated from the UPS AC input and AC output. The battery may be resistance grounded through 5,000 to 10,000 ohms for the purpose of ground fault sensing.

H. Do not use continuous moving parts or electron tubes. Accomplish power switching using semiconductor devices.

I. Construct equipment so each power component can be replaced without a soldering iron or special tools.

J. Use front-panel removable plug-in control modules.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Electroplate brackets and securing hardware with corrosion resistant material. Secure bolts, studs and nuts with lock washers.

B. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug.

C. Conversion Equipment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure allowing access from front for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged door equipped with tumbler lock and latch handle. Equip cabinet for fork truck lifting.

D. Equip air inlet with permanent type filters and pressurize cabinet, or use gaskets around door and panel openings to prevent entry of dirt.

E. Cabinet finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with suitable semi-gloss enamel.

2.6 BATTERY

A. Storage Battery: Lead calcium heavy duty industrial battery, designed for auxiliary power service. Provide battery with impact resistant plastic case. Provide cells with explosion proof vents, clear containers, and ample space for plate growth without stressing container and cover.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 6

B. Electrolyte Specific Gravity: No greater than 1.250 when full charged and measured at 77 degrees F.

C. Ampere-Hour Rating: Sufficient to supply direct current to inverter for outage period specified, with inverter operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 volts per cell.

D. Battery Racks: Maximum of three-tier, all steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at all points of contact with the battery case. Paint racks with acid resistant paint.

2.7 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

A. Controls:

1. AC input circuit breaker.

2. Inverter operate switch to initiate inverter operation.

3. Inverter standby switch to cause inverter to cease operation

4. Static switch transfer switch to permit manual actuation of static transfer switch.

5. Static switch lock-out switch to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to inverter.

6. Battery charge timer.

7. Indicator test switch.

8. Static switch preferred input circuit breaker

9. Static switch output circuit breaker.

10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker.

11. Controls for maintenance bypass switch.

B. Indicators:

1. Inverter synchronized to utility.

2. Load connected to utility.

3. Static transfer switch inhibited.

4. High/low DC voltage.

5. Overtemperature.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 7

6. Inverter output overload.

C. Meters: Use 1 percent accuracy meters to indicate the following:

1. Rectifier/charger DC voltage and current.

2. Utility, inverter output, and load AC voltage.

3. Load AC current.

4. Inverter output and utility frequency.

5. UPS output watts.

D. Wall-mounted Alarm Panel: Surface mounted annunciator panel with the following monitoring and alarm functions:

1. Utility power available.

2. Utility bypass power available.

3. Inverter output available.

4. Inverter synchronized to utility.

5. Load connected to inverter output.

6. Load connected to utility bypass power (alarm).

7. Static transfer switch inhibited (alarm).

8. High/low DC voltage (alarm).

9. Overtemperature (alarm).

10. Inverter output overload (alarm).

11. Audible alarm (sounds when any of the above alarm conditions occur).

12. Alarm/indicator silence/test switch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 33 53 - 8

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field technician to supervise adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

B. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000.

1. Verify specification performance criteria.

2. Measure battery discharge and recharge times.

3. Simulate fault in each system component and utility power.

3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate operation uninterruptible power supply by simulating an outage.

B. Training: Provide 2 hours of instruction each for two persons.

1. Instruction to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.

B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.

C. Provide service and maintenance of uninterruptible power supply for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

D. Include all costs, including labor, parts, and travel.

END OF SECTION 26 33 53

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange General Provisions for Communications 27 00 10 - 1

SECTION 27 00 10

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Division 26 and 28 requirements for cabling, raceways, and all other applicable materials shall apply to Division 27 work.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Definitions

2. Contract documents

3. Code requirements

4. Permits and Fees

5. Alternates

6. Submittal requirements

7. Prior approval requests

8. Schedule of Values

9. Warranty

10. Construction phasing

11. Project closeout requirements

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide shall mean to furnish and install.

B. In general, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and/or on the drawings, shall be as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). Terms not specifically defined in this article shall be as defined in IEEE 100, IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms.

1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. All limited energy systems, mounting hardware, labor and other items indicated on the Division 27 drawings, schedules and/or in the specifications shall be included in the Contractor's bid, unless specifically indicated otherwise. The specifications, schedules, diagrams, details and plans are complementary and what is indicated on any is as binding as if indicated on all. Where a conflict exists between what is shown and what is specified, the more stringent shall govern.

B. The contract drawings indicate the extent and the general character and approximate location and arrangement of material and equipment. The documents do not necessarily show the total number of conductors, raceways, boxes, support, access panels, actual routing, block outs,

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange General Provisions for Communications 27 00 10 - 2

cable sleeves, exact device or equipment locations or other such detailed information for the work required. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials as required by applicable code and product specification for a complete and fully operational installation in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications.

C. The Division 27 documents do not separate work or responsibilities of sub-contractors. The General Contractor is responsible for defining the scope of work of each contractor. This specification recognizes only one contractor. That is the General Contractor who signs the contract with the Owner. Where the term 'The Contractor' is used, it applies to the contractor responsible for the installation of the work described.

1.5 CODES

A. The installation of this work shall comply in every way with the requirements of the laws, ordinances and rules of the State, the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the National Electrical Code, and the Owner.

B. If any conflict occurs between these rules and this specification, the rules shall govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming with governing codes. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of herein aforementioned rules and not contrary to same.

1.6 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, registration fees and inspections required by-laws, ordinances and rules governing the work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of the work by inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.

B. The Division 27 bid shall include all state required permits, inspections, licensing, registration or any other fees associated with the work specified under this Division.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 260010 Electrical General Provisions.

B. Provide brochures and shop drawings on the following materials:

1. Telecommunications Cabling system

2. A/V systems equipment

3. Sound Reinforcement systems equipment

4. Nurse Call/Code Blue systems equipment

5. Clock systems equipment

6. Intercommunications system equipment

1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall furnish a breakdown of the Division 27 work as indicated in the following Schedule of Values:

1. Communications Cabling System, Material

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange General Provisions for Communications 27 00 10 - 3

2. Communications Cabling System, Labor

3. A/V Systems, Material

4. A/V Systems, Labor

5. Sound Systems, Material

6. Sound Systems, Labor

7. Nurse Call/Code Blue Systems, Material

8. Nurse Call/Code Blue Systems, Labor

9. Clock Systems, Material

10. Clock Systems, Labor

11. Intercommunications System, Material

12. Intercommunications System, Labor

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. This Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of all material, equipment and installations provided under this specification. Make good, repair or replace, as may be necessary, any defective work, materials or equipment which fail or become defective within one year after date of Owner occupancy. The beginning of the warranty period is to be determined by the Architect at the time of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIRMENTS

A. All materials shall be new and must be equal to the quality herein specified and as shown on the drawings or a reviewed and accepted equal.

B. All materials shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design and shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI or UL.

C. All material, equipment and devices shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall be manufactured for use with the system specified and the intended application.

D. Materials and equipment shall be delivered to the project and stored in original containers or cartons and shall be properly protected from the elements, theft or vandalism. Items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry spaces.

E. Material damaged during construction shall be replaced or repaired to the Owner's satisfaction.

2.2 GENERAL LIMITED ENERGY SYSTEMS CABLING REQUIREMENTS

A. All Category 6 cable provided under this contract shall conform to the requirements of specification section 271000. The material and installation requirements specified in section 271000 are applicable project-wide to all systems employing Category 6 cable.

B. All interior open air cable shall be plenum rated. All cable run below floor or underground shall be rated for wet locations and installed in conduit.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange General Provisions for Communications 27 00 10 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION

A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent technicians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent foreman. All work shall be complete and present a neat and symmetrical appearance. Non-professional workmanship shall be removed and replaced if so directed by the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. All equipment and material shall be installed so as to comply with all applicable codes and industry standard work practices.

C. All work and materials shall be subject to inspection at any and all times by representatives of the Owner and/or Architect.

D. The documents do not show all necessary transitions, offsets, changes in direction or every pull or junction box required. Provide all boxes necessary to install work to conform to the structure.

3.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. VoiP Telephone system, handsets and other associated hardware.

B. Telecommunications cable, fiber optic cable, jacks, patch panels, racks, etc.

C. Network servers, switches or UPS units.

3.3 PHASING AND SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction phasing and scheduling unless specifically indicated elsewhere in the bid documents is the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Electrical and Communications trades shall coordinate their work with the General Contractor.

3.4 COORDINATION

A. All Division sub-contractors shall coordinate their work with the Owner's IT representative.

B. Prior to beginning work all Division 27 sub-contractors shall participate in a pre-construction meeting to discuss and coordinate their work with the Owner's IT representatives.

3.5 MEETINGS AND FIELD OBSERVATION

A. The requirements of Division 26 General provisions apply to Division 27.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange General Provisions for Communications 27 00 10 - 5

3.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. The project closeout requirements of Section 260010 Electrical General Provisions apply to Division 27.

END OF SECTION 27 00 10

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Common Work Results for Communications Systems 27 05 00 - 1

SECTION 27 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Communications equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for pathways and cables.

3. Sleeve sealant.

4. Grout.

5. Plywood backboards.

6. Common communications installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymerber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sealant and firestopping material.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. To provide clear unobstructed access to equipment provided by others for maintenance.

5. So connecting raceways, pathways, cables, wireways and cable trays will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

6. To maintain access and keep passageways clear.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Common Work Results for Communications Systems 27 05 00 - 2

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Refer to Architectural specifications for Access Doors and Frames.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Above grade wall sleeves for cable: EMT conduit with nylon throat connectors and plastic bushing on each end.

B. Interior to exterior, below grade sleeves for low voltage cable shall be PVC conduit.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and one or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.3 SLEEVE SEALANT

A. General construction: Silicone sealant in accordance with the requirements of Architectural specifications.

B. Fire rated assemblies: Provide fire sealant per the specification requirements of Division 26.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS

A. Grade 'A', 4'w x 8'h, 3/4", fire retardant treated with two coats of (fire resistant) white paint. Do not paint over fire resistant lumber stamp.

2.5 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Access panels servicing Division 26-28 equipment shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26-28. All access doors on the project are to be the product of one manufacturer and are to meet the requirements of the Architectural specification. Closely coordinate the type of access doors and locations with all other Divisions.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Common Work Results for Communications Systems 27 05 00 - 3

B. Where required for access to hidden junction boxes or other communications equipment, the doors shall be sized as necessary to provide proper working clearance.

C. Provide identification tags for all Division 27 access doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with all pertinent requirements of Divisions 07 and 09.

C. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounted items.

D. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

E. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

F. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

G. All material and equipment shall be installed symmetrical, level, plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when raceways, sleeves, cables or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, framed or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Sleeves through non-rated walls, ceilings or floors, above grade: Use EMT conduit sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. Comply with architectural specification requirements for firestopping.

D. Seal space between sleeves and wall penetration with epoxy grout for masonry and caulking for framed construction. Solidly seal between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

E. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Architectural specification for Joint Sealants.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Common Work Results for Communications Systems 27 05 00 - 4

F. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot­type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Coordinate locations with General Contractor. No sleeve required for continuous point to point direct buried conduit runs. Sleeves for direct buried cable or future foundation wall penetrations, install PVC Schedule 40 conduit through wall or floor. Seal space between wall and conduit or sleeve with masonry grout.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Architectural specifications.

B. Install sleeves through rated assemblies in accordance with the requirements of Divisions 07, 09, and 26.

3.4 CLEANUP

A. The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish and debris at all times. Surplus material, tools and equipment must not be stored at the job site. At the completion of the job, all equipment and fixtures shall be left clean and in proper condition for their intended use.

B. Removal of refuse, debris, cuttings, packaging, cartons, etc. for work provided under Division 26-28 shall be the responsibility of each related section of Division 26-28.

C. Cleanup shall be done continually during construction, at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, occupants, workmen, the premise and adjacent property.

D. Before acceptance of the installation, carefully clean cabinets, panels, boxes, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied.

3.5 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD

A. Mount backboards +6" AFF to +8'-6" AFF. Secure to each structural wall studs with self-tapping screws, 24" on center (vertically).

B. Thoroughly clean prior to painting. Provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats of white fire retardant paint.

C. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

END OF SECTION 27 05 00

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 1

SECTION 27 10 06

STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Telecommunications service entrance to building(s).

B. Cabling and pathways inside building(s).

C. Cabling and pathways connecting building(s).

D. Distribution frames, cross-connection equipment, enclosures, and outlets.

E. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 07) for Firestopping.

B. Refer to additional specifications (i.e. Division 33) for Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.

C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

E. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Communications Cabling System:

1. Basis of Measurement: By the lineal foot.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery, and installation of cabling, support systems/hardware, and termination.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. CEA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics Association; Revision E, 2005.

B. ICEA S-90-661 - Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With or Without An Overall Shield) For Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements; Insulated Cable Engineers Association

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 2

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. TIA-455-21 - FOTP-21 - Mating Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices; 2012.

E. TIA-492AAAB-A - Detail Specification for 50-um Core Diameter/125-um Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers; 2009.

F. TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; Rev B, 2010.

G. TIA/EIA-568-C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements; Rev C, 2012; Addenda 1-7.

H. TIA/EIA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev C, 2012; Addenda 1-11.

I. TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2012.

J. TIA/EIA-606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev B, 2012.

K. ANSI/J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.

L. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 497 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 1863 - Standard for Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for administrative requirements pertinent to submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

2. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

D. Manufacturer Qualifications.

E. Installer Qualifications.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 3

F. Field Test Reports.

G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.

2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.

3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of project record documents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 3 years experience in the installation and testing of the type of system specified, and:

1. Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).

2. Supervisors and installers shall be factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.

3. Approved by the Manufacturer; certified to install the proposed and submitted cabling system and to provide an extended warranty. Provide satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the proposal submission.

4. Employing experienced technicians for all work; show at least 3 years experience in the installation of the type of system specified, with evidence from at least 2 projects that have been in use for at least 18 months; submit project name, address, and written certification by user.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. See Division 01 for warranty requirements pertinent to Closeout Submittals.

B. Correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. The telecommunications horizontal cabling system, as specified in this section, shall receive a Manufacturer system warranty. This extended warranty shall cover parts and labor for the duration of the extended warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover electrical performance of cabling system to the specific category per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B performance criteria.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cabling and Equipment:

1. 3M Telecommunications: solutions.3m.com/wps/portal/3M/en_US/Telecom/Home.

2. TE Connectivity: www.te.com.

3. Siemon Company: www.siemon.com.

4. Substitutions: See Division 01 for information pertinent to Product Requirements.

2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions.

2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and are UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.

3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.

4. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.

B. Capacity:

1. Building Entrance: By others.

2. Horizontal Cabling: Copper.

C. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating cables that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to external service provider.

1. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.

2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 20 percent spare space.

D. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that extend to telecommunications outlets.

1. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.

E. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate distribution frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame at center hub of star.

F. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links".

2.3 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534; provide pull cords in all conduit.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 5

B. Cable Trays: As specified in Section 26 0536.

C. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC-40 conduit.

2.4 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS

A. Copper Backbone Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 100 pairs formed into 25-pair binder groups; covered with gray thermoplastic jacket and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest editions of TIA/EIA-568 and ICEA S-90-661, and UL 444.

1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMR riser-rated or type CMP plenum-rated cable.

2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.

3. Provide cable having conductors twisted at minimum rate of two per foot; actual length and frequency of twists at manufacturer's option.

4. Color code conductors in accordance with ICEA S-90-661.

B. Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually twisted pairs; covered with blue jacket and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and UL 444.

1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMG general purpose, CMR riser-rated, or type CMP plenum-rated cable.

2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.

3. Where outdoors, underground or below slab provide OSP rated cable.

C. Jacks and Connectors: RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement connectors; high impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal cable and UL 1863.

1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.

2. Voice and Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T568A configuration, with color-coded indications for T568B configuration.

2.5 FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND ADAPTORS

A. Fiber Optic Backbone Cable: 24-fiber, multimode 50/125 um, complying with TIA-492AAAB; covered with orange cable jacket and complying with relevant portions of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568.

1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNR nonconductive-riser-rated or type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.

2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.

B. Fiber Optic Horizontal Cable: Two-fiber, multimode 50/125 um, complying with TIA-492AAAB; covered with orange single jacket and complying with relevant portions of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568.

1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFN nonconductive general purpose, OFNR nonconductive-riser-rated, or type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.

2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type OFNP nonconductive-plenum-rated cable.

3. Where outdoors, underground or below slab provide OSP rated cable.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 6

C. Fiber Optic Adapters and Connectors: Duplex SC, push-on-push-off type, multimode adaptors with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves; complying with relevant parts and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and with maximum attenuation of 0.3 dB at 1300 nm with less than 0.2 dB change after 500 mating cycles when tested in accordance with TIA-455-21.

2.6 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Connector Blocks for Category 5e and Up Cabling: Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; capacity sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.

B. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit board interface.

1. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.

2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.

3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.

5. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.

C. Patch Panels for Fiber Optic Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum.

1. Adaptors: As specified above under FIBER OPTIC CABLING; maximum of 24 duplex adaptors per standard panel width.

2. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

3. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.

4. Provide rear cable management tray at least 8 inches deep with removable cover.

5. Provide dust covers for unused adaptors.

6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire-retardant.

1. Size: 48 inches wide by 96 inches high.

2. Do not paint over UL label.

B. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: CEA-310 standard 19 inch wide component racks.

1. Wall Mounted Racks: 8 gage aluminum brackets, hinged to allow access to back of installed components.

2. Freestanding Cabinets: Front and rear doors with locks; removable side panels with locks; vented top and rear door; adjustable leveling feet; cable access in roof and base; grounding bar.

a. Roof mounted fan.

3. Wall Mounted Cabinets: Front doors with locks, louvered side panels, top and bottom cable access, and ground lug.

a. Cover inside of cabinet back with plywood backboard as specified.

b. Roof mounted fan.

c. Duplex AC power outlet inside cabinet.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 7

4. Cabinets: 16 gage steel construction with corrosion resistant finish.

5. Locks: Keyed alike.

C. Building Entrance Protector: Factory fabricated panel to connect incoming cable and interior cable to protector modules.

1. Capacity: One protector module per pair in incoming cable.

2. Protector Modules: Type rated for the application.

a. Solid State Type: Complying with UL 497.

3. Incoming Side: Provide connector blocks of type specified.

4. Outgoing Side (to Interior): Backbone cable wired to connector blocks.

D. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius.

1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

2. Wall-Mounted Telephones: 4 inches high by 2 inches wide by 2-1/8 inches deep.

3. Boxes for Fiber Optic Outlets: Single or two gang as indicated.

a. Size: 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

4. Wall Plates: Material and finish to match wiring device and wall plate finishes specified in Section 26 2726, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.

5. Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers; label each jack on the face plate as to its function with a unique numerical identifier.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568, TIA/EIA-569, ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2.

3.2 EXISTING CABLING AND DEVICES

A. Cabling:

1. Disconnect from devices and pull up into ceiling space.

2. Coil above ceiling for future use.

3. Re-terminate to existing-to-remain devices where shown on the Drawings after completion of all other demolition/reconstruction.

4. Test termination and connection to MDF/IDF. Provide corrective action where required to achieve complete functionality.

B. Devices

1. Leave existing-to-remain devices in place where shown on the Drawings.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade; encase in at least 3 inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line.

B. Install with the following minimum clearances:

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 8

1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power systems.

2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.

3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.

4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.

C. Conduit:

1. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.

2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.

3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed.

a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms.

b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to view.

c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members.

d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.

D. Outlet Boxes:

1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.

a. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1) Telephone and Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.

2) Telephone Outlets for Side-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 54 inches above finished floor to top of telephone.

3) Telephone Outlets for Forward-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 48 inches above finished floor to top of telephone.

b. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

c. Provide minimum of 24 inches horizontal separation between flush mounted outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of fire rated walls.

d. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate outlet boxes for line voltage and low voltage devices.

e. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not span different building finishes.

f. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not cross masonry joints.

E. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING

A. Cabling:

1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.

2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.

3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.

4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or damage outer jacket.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 9

B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, looped neatly:

1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.

2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.

3. At Outlets - Optical Fiber: 39 inches.

C. Copper Cabling:

1. Category 5e/6: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from point of termination.

2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.

3. Copper Cabling Not in Conduit: Use only type CMP plenum-rated cable as specified.

D. Fiber Optic Cabling:

1. Prepare for pulling by cutting outer jacket for 10 inches from end, leaving strength members exposed. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye.

2. Support vertical cable at intervals as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Wall-Mounted Racks and Enclosures:

1. Install to plywood backboards only, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mount so height of topmost panel does not exceed 78 inches above floor.

F. Floor-Mounted Racks and Enclosures: Permanently anchor to floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

G. Floor-Mounted Enclosures: Connect adjacent cabinets together and remove interior side panels.

H. Field-Installed Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

1. Cables: Install color coded labels on both ends.

2. Outlets: Label each jack on its face plate as to its type and function, with a unique numerical identifier.

3. Patch Panels: Label each jack as to its type and function, with a unique numerical identifier.

4. Patch Cords: Label with jack identifier corresponding to initial installation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.

B. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.

2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.

3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.

4. Inspect patch cords for complete labels.

C. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:

1. Test backbone cables after termination but before cross-connection.

12/01/2015

Convert Baskin-Robbins to Freshens Davis-Monthan Exchange Structured Cabling for Voice and Data 27 10 06 - 10

2. Test backbone cables for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between connectors and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield.

3. Category 5e/6 Backbone: Perform near end cross talk (NEXT) and attenuation tests.

4. Category 5e/6 Links: Perform tests for wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, and propagation delay.

D. Testing - Fiber Optic Cabling:

1. Backbone: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation test using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) and manufacturer's recommended test procedures; perform verification acceptance tests and factory reel tests.

2. Multimode Backbone: Perform tests in accordance with TIA/EIA-526-14 Method B.

3. Links: Perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests and field reel tests.

E. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets, and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.

END OF SECTION 27 10 06